YFP 279: Finding Your Pharmacist Voice: An Interview with Kim Newlove


Kim Newlove, founder of The Pharmacist’s Voice and host of The Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast, shares how and why she started her business in 2017, how she pivoted from her initial service and business idea, and what myths as a business owner she has found to be untrue. 

About Today’s Guest

Kim Newlove is a pharmacist, voice actor, podcast host, wife, Mom of 2 teenagers, and volunteer.

She earned her Bachelor of Science Degree in Pharmacy from The University of Toledo in 2001, and is an Ohio pharmacist. Kim founded The Pharmacist’s Voice ®, LLC in 2017, and launched The Pharmacist’s Voice ® Podcast in 2019. Her website is thepharmacistsvoice.com.

Finding the right voice for an audio project is important. Kim brings her years of expertise as a pharmacist to her audiobook and voiceover projects. Her delivery style is confident and trustworthy.

The Pharmacist’s Voice ® Podcast is a weekly podcast. It’s available on her website (thepharmacistsvoice.com) and all major podcast players. Kim alternates solo shows and interview shows. She shares her journey from pharmacist to voice actor and interviews a variety of people who use their voices advocate for something, educate in some way, or entertain so that listeners are inspired to use their voices too.

In her spare time, Kim enjoys spending time with family, playing Ticket to Ride Switzerland, swimming, and riding her BMW motorbike.

Episode Summary

This week, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by Kim Newlove, founder of The Pharmacist’s Voice and host of The Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast. In this episode, Tim and Kim discuss Kim’s journey from graduation in 2001 to the start of her business in 2017, the student loan debt picture in 2001 compared to today, and the power of having a plan for handling student debt. Kim explains the reasoning behind working part-time in her career and the financial decisions she and her husband made that tie into the success of her business journey. Coming from a position of financial strength because of sound financial decisions early in her career, Kim was confident investing in herself and starting her business. Kim shares the motivation behind The Pharmacist’s Voice and The Pharmacist’s Voice podcast, what inspired the name of her business, and how she was able to distill a business idea that worked for her as a mother, wife, and pharmacist. While Kim’s original business idea of narrating continuing education journals has not yet come to fruition, she and Tim talk about the evolution of her business offerings and how she was able to pivot to medical narration, e-learning, and voiceovers. Kim and Tim wrap up the episode by busting some entrepreneurship myths and shedding light on the hard work behind what it is to produce a podcast and run a company. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had the opportunity to sit down with Kim Newlove, Founder of the Pharmacist’s Voice and host of the Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast. During the show, we discuss how and why she started her own business, the Pharmacist’s Voice, in 2017, how she had a pivot early on from her initial service and business idea, and what myths as a business owner she has found to be untrue. 

Now, before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. 

Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. Okay, let’s jump into my interview with Kim Newlove. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:15] TU: Kim, welcome to the show. 

[00:01:15] KN: Hi, Tim. Good to be here.

[00:01:19] TU: Well, so excited to have you. Spent a long time in the making. We talked back in the winter, and then we had a chance to connect in person at Ohio Pharmacists Association meeting. I came on your podcast and really excited for the opportunity to talk several different things with you, entrepreneurship. We’ll talk a little bit about family. We’ll talk about personal finance. I want to start with your career and some of your career background. So where did you go to pharmacy school, when did you graduate, and what ultimately drew you into the profession?

[00:01:50] KN: Okay. If I leave anything out, remind me. I went to the University of Toledo College of Pharmacy. I graduated in 2001 with my Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy degree. I never got my PharmD. What was the next question, Tim?

[00:02:06] TU: So where you went to school, you answered that. Go Rockets, right? Toledo, 2001. 

[00:02:11] KN: That’s right. Go Rockets. 

[00:02:12] TU: When you graduated, you answered that. What drew you into the profession?

[00:02:16] KN: What drew me into the profession most was my Uncle Tom inviting me to shadow him when I was an eighth grade junior high student at Eastwood Junior High School in Somerville, Ohio. He invited me to watch him as a surgery pharmacist at St. V’s, which is one of the major hospitals in the Toledo area. I also, of course, love to help people, and I was good at math and science, and I really felt like I had all of those attributes that a pharmacist needed, being trustworthy and being interested in helping people and being intelligent and all the things.

[00:02:56] TU: So some of our listeners, they wouldn’t be aware but maybe interested to know. We share a Northwest Ohio connection. So my wife, Jess, is from the Bowling Green Perrysburg area. You’re, obviously, in Northwest Ohio as well. A little Rockets-Falcons rivalry that’s going on between Bowling Green and Toledo. So you came, and you snuck in right before the PharmD requirement, right? Because that would have been early 2000s. So you came in right before that.

[00:03:22] KN: Right. I was – One of the last classes to graduate was my class. I graduated in ’01 and, I think, in ’04. That was the cutoff. My brother, who’s also a pharmacist, graduated in ’03 with his bachelor’s. Never got his PharmD either. Yeah. It’s a great school. But, yeah, our cutoff didn’t end until ’04 for some reason.

[00:03:44] TU: And we’re going to talk in a bit about the Pharmacist’s Voice. For those that are watching this interview, they can see your background behind you. We’re going to talk about the business that you’ve created, what you’re doing, why you started it, what you offer. But before we get into that, give us some of the career journey because I think this is a really interesting part of your story and your family’s story, as we’re going to talk some personal finance here in a little bit. 2001, you graduate. It wouldn’t be till 2017, correct, that you launched the business? 

[00:04:14] KN: Correct. 

[00:04:15] TU: So give us the CliffsNotes synopsis version of your pharmacy career from graduation prior to starting the business.

[00:04:24] KN: Oh, boy. Oh, boy. There’s some retail in there, some hospitals, some compounding, and some behavioral health. I started off working at a small hospital. The schedule wasn’t right for me as a newlywed. I got married about six weeks after graduation in June of 2001. I passed the boards right away, like two days before I got married, which was kind of cool, yay me. Everybody was saying, “Congratulations on getting married. Did you pass the boards?” “Yeah.” “Okay. Congratulations on that too.” 

Then after that, about a year of trialing out, working at a small hospital and the hours not working out, I switched to working for Walgreens, and I worked part time at that hospital for about five months to transition my replacement in. Then I was working full-time at Walgreens for not – Well, sorry. Not for nine years. I worked at Walgreens for nine years, only worked full-time for about one year. Then I had my first child. 

While I was working part time at Walgreens, I worked at a small compounding pharmacy. If nobody would know the name, we got bought out by a competitor. But the focus was respiratory solutions for inhalation, and I coincidentally had baby number two, right, as we were getting bought out. I never went back to that job. I didn’t stop working for Walgreens until 2011. When I stopped working at Walgreens in 2011, our agreement, my husband and my agreement, was that I would stay home for one year. Then I would start looking for another job. 

I started looking for another job immediately because I can’t follow my own plans sometimes. But I didn’t get the jobs that I tried out for, so I truly stayed home for that one year. It was after that one year that my husband started getting other opportunities in climbing the ladder, and I ended up staying at home. 

Well, fast forward to the year 2015, I couldn’t just stay at home, Tim. I had to do something. So I started volunteering quite a bit. I had already volunteered some with the University of Toledo. While I was volunteering, I got connected with a woman who invited me to be her relief pharmacist in – I think it was October or November of 2015. I had been off the market for four and a half years. I felt a little rusty. But the job she offered me was really in line with some of my volunteer work, and it was at a behavioral health hospital. 

I worked there for one year. She moved on. I was her relief pharmacist. I didn’t feel comfortable staying without her, so I ended that job, and I didn’t work again until I started my company.

[00:07:02] TU: So we’re going to come back to that in a little bit. My first question for you, though, is student loan debt in 2001. A very different picture than what it is here in 2022, unfortunately, even if we adjust for inflation, right, which is something that we’re all thinking about at the moment. The numbers are drastically different. 

Our listeners know today, graduates coming out on average about $175,000 of debt. Often that will be much higher than that if we factor in undergrad debt and other expenses for those who go to private school. So tell us about, for you, even though that debt may have been a significant part of the journey, numbers were much smaller, right?

[00:07:39] KN: Numbers were much smaller. Yes. You know, Tim, every time you say that number, when I listen to your podcast, it moves up. 

[00:07:46] TU: It does. 

[00:07:47] KN: It used to be like 170. Now, we’re up to 175. For students listening to this, much respect. I know that’s a huge burden to take on. My student loan debt, I added this up before our interview here. From what my records show, I had $23,888.28 in student loan debt. I used 13,650 for actually paying tuition and all that. Then the disbursements were a little over $10,000, and I lived off that. I bought my books, my gas for my car at, what was it, 97 cents a gallon back then. I had to live off of that. 

I actually went back to my earnings history too to find out how much I made as an intern. In 1999, I made $10,000 as an intern, which was pretty good. But you know you got to live and, yeah, the student loan debt is real. I paid it off, I want to say, in less than two years. 

[00:08:47] TU: Yeah, yeah. I think for many graduates today, the number in and of itself is a lot to work through in terms of monthly payment. Obviously, right now, we’ve got a pause on those payments, which has certainly helped a lot of people. But it’s not only the dollar amount. It’s the paralyzing nature of the feeling that can come from that that can cloud the ability to make other decisions. 

So one of the things we often talk with individuals about is, yes, we’ve got to attack the number or perhaps pursued something like loan forgiveness. But we also need to make sure we don’t underestimate the power of having a plan. Even if that number doesn’t change a whole lot next week, something is drastically different if we can start to put a plan in place, so we can begin to move forward and consider that piece of the puzzle as we also look at other parts of the financial plan. 

I do want to come back to one thing that you mentioned because I think that we often assume that pharmacists are the breadwinner in the family. Pharmacists are the ones that are going to be making a significant income, especially if it’s two incomes that are in the household. You mentioned something that I thought was really important to touch on that others may be considering, which is you mentioned your husband and his income opportunities. Before we hit record, you mentioned several points of his career, where he had an opportunity to kind of level up to the next level. 

I think that was an interesting approach that you guys decided on as a family together that there was going to be an investment in his career and some of the upward mobility and upward nature of that income, which may not have necessarily been there with a pharmacist income. Can you talk more about how you got to that decision and why that was best for your family? 

[00:10:30] KN: Yes. If I leave anything out and you need clarifying details, please let me know. My story is very different. I mean, I come from a place of currently being a stay-at-home parent. Tim, you talk about pharmacists often being the breadwinner because they earn more money than their partner. I am a pharmacist by training. My husband is a mechanical engineer by training. 

When we started having kids, which happened pretty darn quick after I graduated, within like 18 months of graduation, I started having the kids. We talked about who’s going to stay at home or what are we going to do about daycare. At the time, we lived in Toledo, Ohio, which some people may think of as, “Oh, it’s big urban area. How can you trust people?” There were plenty of great choices in Toledo. Did we have anything set up? No. I worked full-time, seven on, seven off as a midnight pharmacist. I made a great income. 

As I mentioned before, when we started out, I also had a part-time job in the first five months of my employment as a pharmacist as a part-time hospital pharmacist. I had this income. My top earnings ever was like $97,000. I looked at my husband after we had this baby and I said, “I can make at least $97,000 working full-time as a pharmacist. Let’s look at how much you make.” Just disclosing how much he made in the year 2003 when our first son was born, it was around $60,000. He made significantly less than me. He said, “You know what? I don’t have a ceiling on how much I can make. But you kind of seem like you do.”

That was something I had never thought of. Being the mechanical engineer, a very data-driven person, and just somebody who I would actually listen to, I listened to him. What I did was I became a part-time pharmacist, full-time mom. Could I have gotten daycare? Could I have gotten somebody to care for my kids? Yeah, I could have. But we decided as a couple, that was not what we were going to do. Plus, we wanted to have another kiddo in about two years. That was just our plan. 

So I thought it was pretty hard being pregnant and being a pharmacist, standing on my feet all day, with the challenges of going to the bathroom and eating and drinking. Why would I bring that upon myself, and I’m exhausted just having a newborn? So we decided his 60,000, plus my going part-time, we thought would be maybe anywhere from 25,000 to 50,000, that would equal what my full-time income would be if I just went out and was the sole breadwinner, and he would stay at home and make no income. 

But you got to keep in mind. He had that opportunity to climb up the ladder, not just in title but in earnings. So I took that leap of faith, Tim, and I let my career take a backseat. I wasn’t that far into my career, and I haven’t accomplished that much. I didn’t have as much to lose, I guess you could say. So that is one of the factors that played into that.

[00:13:45] TU: Kim, what really stands out there to me is even in this case, you decided that for you and your family, it was going to be your career that was going to be a little bit on the back seat. Obviously, you mentioned your husband realizing that there was perhaps some more upward mobility in role over time. But even if those roles were flipped, right? Because I think there can be a lot of pride that can come through, especially for the pharmacist that may be listening. They can, “Hey, wait a minute. I just invested you know, $200,000, plus 6, 8, 10 years of my time,” and maybe this is something that they are considering as well. 

But whether it’s like your situation or even if the roles were reversed and your husband were the one to say, “Hey, I’m going to let my career take a backseat because this is what we want to do as our family,” I admire the intentionality, and I’m sure these were in-depth conversations that happened at the time. But really just the openness and the transparency and the intentionality of saying, “Okay, what do we want as our family? What do we think is best for our family unit?” 

That could be and is different for many different families, and there is no right or wrong answer. I think that’s so important for everyone to hear. But really, what is it for you that you and your family want and how do you ultimately be able to set up the infrastructure and the system that works best for you. So I really respect and admire that. My wife, Jess, and I have had a lot of those similar conversations along the way as well. 

You know what’s interesting, though? So I’m reflecting in 2022, and we think about what a pharmacist is making today. Your theory held true, right? So has the pharmacist income gone up since? You mentioned the $97,000. It has. But if you factor in inflation and other things, it really has had a ceiling, right? It really has had a ceiling, and I think we’re continuing to see that with some exceptions, and there certainly are some areas of practice where that may not necessarily be the case. 

So my next question for you is you decide in 2017 that you’re going to use your pharmacy background and degree in a very different way, in a nontraditional way, not only in starting your own business but in using your voice and under the brand what would become the Pharmacist’s Voice. My question here is what was the genesis of the Pharmacist’s Voice? I don’t know the answer to this question, so I’m excited to learn the answer. How did the idea come to be and what ultimately led you to begin down this path of starting your own business?

[00:16:13] KN: The genesis of the company name, let’s start with that. It came incredibly organically because I wanted to take my background as a pharmacist and my speaking voice or my voice and writing and combine them to do something in commerce, creating a company that did something. I knew I wanted to use my voice. Now, the why, why did I want to use my voice? That is like the best part. 

I have a son with autism. He is currently 19 years old, almost 19 and a half. I can’t believe it. He is nonverbal, and the thing that happens to a lot of people who have a child with challenges happened to me. If you’ve ever seen people on the news that have a child in a wheelchair, and the parent becomes a marathon runner, and they run those marathons together, and the parent is pushing the wheelchair. Or if you meet somebody who has a child who ends up being a deaf child, a child that’s hearing impaired. That adult, that parent learns sign language and becomes an advocate, right?

Having a person in my life who cannot speak, he cannot read, write, or speak that we know of, it really inspired me to respect my own voice and recognize the power of having a voice and using it. There are so many people that don’t take their passions and their strengths and use them. You have a responsibility to use your passions and your strength to do something that matters. Why wouldn’t I take my background as a pharmacist and my speaking voice put them together and make the Pharmacist’s Voice? I’ll tell you, there’s so much more that I want to say about that, but I think I should probably pause and just let you ask your questions.

[00:18:10] TU: Well, I think what I’m really curious about is you just said that there’s so many folks that don’t take their passions and their strengths and take action on it. You mentioned responsibility. I love that challenge because everyone may have a different passion or strength or a different challenge and may feel that sense of responsibility and for whatever reason haven’t acted on it. That can look like a million different things. You we’re talking, obviously, about the Pharmacist’s Voice and the business that you started. 

So my question for you is why do you think people typically are not taking action? Why are they not acting on that responsibility to be able to move forward with that passion, with that strength that they have? I mean, certainly a multitude of reasons. But if we distill it down to a couple, what do you think is typically blocking people from moving forward?

[00:18:59] KN: Man, Tim, you are so lucky I’m an ESTJ. I’m extroverted, right? So I’m not really shy about sharing, and I’m a little judgmental, meaning I’m great at making decisions. So why do people have that problem, that challenge? I want you to know, anybody listening, I’m not judging you if you have barriers to entry, if you have hang ups. I think it might be part personality. 

My personality, if you look at the Enneagram, if anybody knows that personality test, I’m an eight. I am the challenger. I don’t want to say fearless, but I’m the person that sees a problem and takes it as a challenge and wants to conquer it. I’m not the perfectionist, which is the number one, which is my husband, and he has a hard time with his perfectionism. A lot of times, I have to point it out to him and say, “Are you doing this because you don’t understand the first step? Or is it because you’re hesitant? Or have you made a list of pros and cons? I mean, help me understand.” 

For example, he lost his job at a company he was with for more than 12 and a half years in April of 2020. It was April 30th or May 1st of 2020, right as the pandemic was –

[00:20:27] TU: When it started. Yeah. Geez. Yup. 

[00:20:30] KN: Yeah, yeah. So being the support person I am, I wanted to go out there and like a light switch, turn on the business and say, “Oh, I’m going to go out and make all this money.” But voiceover, what I do the voiceover industry, it’s not like having a light switch. You can’t just turn it on. But anyways, what gets in people’s way is – I want to use my husband as an example. He wants to play a matching game. He is a mechanical engineer by training. So when he thinks about getting another job, he wants to match the words mechanical engineer with somebody who’s looking for a mechanical engineer. 

What I taught him about just all the things that I know from marketing and communications and storytelling is that what you really need to think about is all those things in the Ikigai. What do you love to do? What does the world need? What can you get paid to do? All those things. What do you value? Do you want to have to travel to Asia all the time, which is what he was doing two to three weeks at a time, up to five times a year? It was hard on our family. So anyways, that was one of the things, perfectionism.

[00:21:44] TU: Well, and we know that the matching game and perfectionism doesn’t go too well with entrepreneurship or starting something new. So my question for you here is I talked with many pharmacists, probably one or two a week that I can tell they’re on fire, and they’re passionate about something. That something could be another W-2 job. That’s something could be, “Hey, I’ve got this great idea for a book or a podcast or this nonprofit.” I had somebody messaged me recently about an idea they have for a nonprofit or a business idea, whether that’s a service-based or a product-based business. 

But when the conversation moves to, well, what’s next, what’s next, I can tell instantly the tone of voice shifts. Fear starts to come into the equation. More often than not, there starts to be a paralyzing reality of like, “I don’t know what the next step is.” So I’m thinking about those number one Enneagram perfectionists that are out there versus the eight challengers, where you might have an idea, and it’s not all fully fleshed out. Great, I’m going to do one thing that’s the next thing, just to get momentum on this. Then it’ll be messy, and it’ll get better, and I’ll get better, and I’ll get better. I get that, but a lot of people are not comfortable with that. 

So my question is for folks that are listening and saying, “I have an idea. I want to do X, Y, or Z. But there’s 15 things that I’m not sure exactly where do I go next,” like what advice would you have for them? I mean, even if you think about the Pharmacist’s Voice, and I’m looking at your background, and you’ve got nice logos, and you’ve got services and offerings and web things and courses we’ll talk about, that can be overwhelming. So like what is the next step, and how do people discern that?

[00:23:28] KN: Oh, Tim. This is such a great question. I’m so excited to answer this. I had to do this too. I have that problem too. In fact, I have a whole podcast episode about how I funneled all my ideas down to one, and it comes down to, okay, if you can imagine a funnel. Everybody listening to this has been to pharmacy school or their students, right? I mean, think about compounding lab, and you’ve got a funnel. In the top of the funnel, it’s broader than the bottom of the funnel. You put all of those ideas down in the top of the funnel, and you’re going to distill it down to just one. That’s going to pop out the end, and that’s going to be your one that you run with. 

I had all these ideas, and I just put them in that funnel. I mentally worked my way through each of them to find out if they were even possible. In doing that, I figured out that my number one barrier to using probably four or five of my ideas was childcare. I have a child who, at the time, was only – Was he 15? I think he was only 15. But still, rapidly approaching adulthood, can’t read, write, or speak. I’m going to be taking care of this person. I’m going to be as guardian. I’m going to be his full-time caregiver, until death parts us. I’m not trying to be morbid. Sometimes, when you have those constraints, it makes all your decisions that much easier. 

So when I found out that childcare seemed to be my biggest barrier, I realized I needed to find something I could do in the gig economy. It was just that easy, and I knew through my passions, through respecting the voice, and wanting to do something with my voice, that, heck, yeah, I could continue to volunteer when I have time. People don’t expect you to show up when you volunteer 100%. You let them know the expectations. If they can deal with it, they let you continue to volunteer, right? It’s okay to volunteer. You discover your passions that way. 

But then in going through mentally all these ideas, I figured out that I could not go to people’s houses and help them with their medication lists and cleaning up their closets. What if they were running late? What if I was running late? What if there was a school delay or a closing or whatever? I had a sick kid. I would have to cancel on them, and then making it up would be so hard. So anyways, all those things really added up. 

Then talking to other people, Tim, that’s so important. All of your listeners who are interested in entrepreneurship should really be talking to people who do the thing that they want to do. It’s common sense, but it’s also great advice because when you talk to people that do the thing – For example, I wanted to go to patients’ houses, help them clean out their medication closets, and help them make medication lists, just doing some basic MTM type stuff, then cash pay. So I wouldn’t necessarily have to use the insurance company’s definition of MTM. 

I found out that in Ohio, we needed to have a TDDD, a Terminal Distributor of Dangerous Drugs license. I think it was a level two or something. 

[00:26:40] TU: Two. Yeah, you’re right. Category two. 

[00:26:42] KN: Yeah. In order to have patient data in my home or on my computer. Honestly, I didn’t want to deal with that. So in talking to Sue Paul, who we both know through the Ohio Pharmacists Association, she’s an Ohio pharmacist and pharmacogenomics queen, I learned some of the issues that she deals with. I didn’t want to deal with those issues. So again, just fleshing out those ideas like how would I actually make this happen? What are the barriers I would come across? Who already does this? What are the challenges and the rewards? Yeah. Just flushing everything out. 

Out the bottom of the funnel came something where I would use my voice, and I didn’t know that I would be in the voiceover industry when I started. I ended up going into voiceover because my original idea didn’t even work. So I had to take that original idea that came out of the bottom of the funnel and pivot it to something else, which isn’t always fun because you have to admit failure. But you got to have a short memory about it. Kind of like when you’re up to bat and you strike out. You strike out. You still got that third pitch. You might fall or you might have a home run. So just keep swinging. 

[00:27:52] TU: I love that. No, it’s great. I love the practical advice that you gave, in terms of the funnel and having the ideas and talking with others, which I think not only helps you speak out loud your idea, which gets you thinking about it more, internalizing it more. It clarifies your message. Sometimes, I’ll have a great idea. More often than not, the day ends, I go home, and I’ll, “Jess, Jess, Jess. I got this idea. I got this idea.” Then I hear myself say it out loud. Then 24 hours passes, and I’m like, “That was really not a great idea.” But it was in my head, and I started talking out loud. 

Or sometimes, when I have those conversations, the ideas start to crystallize, or she’ll add to it. What about this? What about that? Have you thought about this? Those conversations of people that can help you build upon your idea, that can help you network with other people that have been down that path before, is so powerful. But you said something that the end that I think is so integral for people to remember, which is we have to, on some level, be comfortable with and accepting and embracing some failure along the way. 

I think if we can shift our mind around failure typically has a negative connotation but an opportunity to grow and to learn, but being comfortable with that, and you mentioned the first idea that popped out of the funnel, right? You had to pivot and do something else. Perhaps a whole separate conversation about how we get comfortable with failure. But I think really good advice for folks that are looking to get started because even if you come up with the perfect game plan, guess what, it ain’t going to be perfect. There’s going to be things and bumps along the road that are going to come to be.

[00:29:27] KN: Yeah. You got to have that abundance mindset. 

[00:29:29] TU: That’s right. 

[00:29:30] KN: Like there’s more than one idea here, and it’s okay to flush them out. Write them down too and revisit them because, like you said, Tim, you may come home and talk to your wife, Jess, and say, “I have the best idea.” But then when it comes out of your mouth, that doesn’t sound so good. But she’s kind of like a good sounding board, and she’ll tell you what’s good about it, and maybe you can just write it down. So I hope everybody out there has their own Jess or even a notepad and sleep on it and look at it another day.

[00:29:56] TU: I love it. I love it. We’re now – I’ve got four boys at home. I’ve talked about it before in my podcast, but it’s been fun, as my oldest is now about to be 11, and he’s heard so many of these conversations with my wife and I, just in passing. Just this weekend, he came up with, “Well, Dad, what about this idea? Wouldn’t it save time if we had a toothbrush that had two different brushes, so you could brush the top and the bottom at once? And is that something that could be invented?” I was like, “That’s it, right? You got to throw ideas out there. The process, they evolve and see what happens over time.” 

So as it relates to the Pharmacist’s Voice, what do you offer? What is the business, what’s the offering, and how has that evolved since 2017 to what you’re working on right now?

[00:30:39] KN: Starting in 2017, my original idea was to narrate pharmacy continuing education journals into audio. My original idea didn’t work. I approached all kinds of companies, for example, APHA. I approached the Ohio Pharmacists Association. I approached Pharmacist’s Letter. There were others too. I pitched it to somebody the other day, but I have a little bit more proof of concept now that I’ve been in the voiceover industry. 

But anyways, I didn’t have proof of concept. I didn’t really know what I was talking about. I didn’t know how to record, edit, and produce audio at the time. Everybody said no, and that’s all I needed. It’s not like I gave up early or anything. I just thought if they don’t like this particular idea, let’s try something else. 

What I did was I pivoted, and the first thing I did was when I pivoted, I went to talk to somebody who could teach me how to record, edit, and produce audio. Somebody who I thought could help me with that. I went to a local audio engineer, and he said, “Oh, yeah. We record people here. But I’m the one that records them. I’m the one that edits them. I’m the one that produces the final files and gives them to the client.” That’s a high ticket item right there. It’s expensive. So I thought, “Well, gosh. How can I do this at home?” 

I went on a journey of learning how to record, edit, and produce audio. I’ll tell you, that’s, for me, the hardest thing about having a podcast, hardest thing about producing audio books, which is one of the services I offer. It’s the hardest thing about creating voiceovers. I had to spend a lot of time in the trenches. Believe it or not, pharmacists would be awesome at this. I mean, if that was like part of the thing like, yes, we dispense pills. We make IVs. We mix audio. Pharmacists are very detail-oriented people. 

It turned out, I love it, and I’m great at it. So on my journey, I learned I can record, edit, and produce this. Great. What am I going to talk about? What am I going to produce? One of the things that the audio engineer that I talked to did for me was he connected me to my very first voiceover coach. I thought, “What’s a voiceover coach? I don’t know what this is. I don’t know if I want to do this.” But he said, “You need to learn how to talk and have good mic skills and all these things.” 

So I went to Nancy Wolfson. If you’re going to write this down, just please know that she is more of an advanced instructor, which is what I found out when I started working with her. She focuses on commercial narration. Once I did – I don’t know if it was eight lessons or something like that. I realized I needed to do medical narration because my heart just wasn’t into talking about pantyhose and banks and things that are on the news. Or not on the news. Radio ads or television ads. 

So anyways, I started working with a different coach, and his name’s David Rosenthal, and he’s with the Global Voice Acting Academy. Definitely look that one up because they do teach young voice actors, if you’re interested, and he helped me with medical narration. He’s like, “Yeah, you can say the words great.” I don’t want to paint him in a bad light, but he said things that I needed to hear. He said that, “You basically don’t know how to deliver. You know how to say the words just fine. You sound like you know what you’re talking about. But then other parts of the delivery are not so great.” During that whole discovery period and learning, I took group classes. I took private classes. I made my first demo. Moving forward, I have worked with other coaches too. 

Now, how did audiobooks come into this? Audiobooks came into this because if you can do audiobooks, you can do e-learning, which is what I have learned. That is what I originally wanted to do. Narrating pharmacy continuing education journals into audio format is e-learning. So I learned how to do audiobooks and e-learning. At the same time, I’m an audiobook narrator. I narrate books that are on Audible, Amazon, and iTunes. They’re for sale. 

Two examples are IMPACT Pharmacist: Start Your Own Wellness Practice and Leave Your Retail Pharmacy Job Behind by Asha and Eric Bohannon. I’ve also narrated Perimenopause: The Savvy Sister’s Guide to Hormone Harmony. So as I’ve been going through this journey, I have been figuring out what people want to pay me to do.

[00:35:18] TU: Well, I like that too because I think it connects back to what we were talking before. Now, you’ve got service offerings. But I’m guessing those have evolved and changed over time, as you kind of figure out what does the market need and want? What is the market willing to pay for? What are they not willing to pay for? Then, obviously, you start to spread that through word of mouth. 

So again, just a great reminder that as folks are getting started with an idea, where you start and where it goes is going to be an evolution. It is, and you’re going to look back and say, “I can’t believe –” I remember back to my first blog post, November 6th, 2015. I read it recently. Yes, I had a great, great story of our journey. But, wow, like writing had a lot to be desired for. I think back to the first podcast that we did in 2017. So it’s a journey. It’s an evolution, and I’m hopeful that we’ll say the same thing five years down the road as well. 

If folks want to learn more about the work you’re doing at the Pharmacist’s Voice and the offerings you have, they can go to thepharmacistsvoice.com. We’ll link to that in the show notes as well. You mentioned your summer project before we hit record, is you’re working on an online course. Tell us more about that.

[00:36:25] KN: Yes. Thanks for the opportunity. If you go to kimnewlove.com, you can see my current online course offering. It’s a drug name pronunciation course, believe it or not, and it’s called Pronounce Drug Names Like a Pro. The next online course, which I have not released yet, but it will be on kimnewlove.com, hopefully, by the end of August. That’s my goal. It will be a behind the scenes look at the Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast. The Pharmacist’s Voice, of course, is my company, but I am a business with a podcast, much like Your Financial Pharmacist. 

So the name of my podcast is the Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast. A lot of people ask me all the time, how do I start a podcast? How do you make your podcast? So this is going to be how I make my podcast, not how you need to make yours. Because a lot of people just want to know what goes into it. What does it look like to edit audio? Because you’re taking a visual representation of something you can hear, and not everybody really understands how you can manipulate something that you can see, but you end up hearing it. It’s really something. So, yeah, that’s my summer project, Tim. Thanks for asking.

[00:37:38] TU: Well, I’m looking forward to that coming out because I have a lot of folks that I talk with. They have interesting ideas or thinking about starting a podcast, and they often get hung up in some of the, “Well, what equipment should I use, and what platform should I use to record?” There’s a million options that are out there, and I like your approach of kind of a behind the scenes of what you’re doing, which I think what will give people some structure and some hooks to be able to hang some things on but not necessary the only way to be able to do or release a podcast show.

[00:38:07] KN: Yes, I agree. Tim, just to add something real quick, that, hopefully, is going to feed into me training pharmacists or healthcare providers, small cohorts, at a time how to start their own podcasts, if there is interest. So send those people my way. I would love to help them. It’d be kind of like a white glove type thing, where you have an idea of what you want to do and you want to flatten that learning curve. I can totally help you do it. I mean, I have my own podcast. I’m on episode 160-something. I know how to do this.

[00:38:37] TU: I love it. I love it. I love it. One of the things I wanted to ask you about is I personally feel that we’re in a period of time where there’s somewhat of an over glorification of entrepreneurship, and I love entrepreneurship. I think it’s something that the skills that are within owning your own business and starting your own business are things that everyone can learn something from, whether or not you have your own business. So, obviously, I’m a huge fan and have really found great benefit in my own journey. 

But I think there are sometimes some myths that come to be with owning your own business that people think, “Oh, well. If I just own my own business, like everything would be okay.” So my question for you is like is there a myth or two that you have found in your own journey and owning your own business that you’d like to share with the audience?

[00:39:33] KN: Oh, my gosh. How many do I get to share?

[00:39:36] TU: Go with it.

[00:39:38] KN: Okay, all right. Thank you for the opportunity to share this because with what I do now, which is voiceover, I do medical narration for pharmaceutical companies, biotech. I do e-learning, I do explainer videos. I do all this. People think you can just plug a microphone into a computer and talk, and the Brink’s truck will backup and dump a bunch of money in your driveway. That, I would say, is the number one myth about what I do now. What I do is voiceover, and it is not like that. 

There are actual studies now for the voiceover industry to demonstrate the people who have been in the business, who are just starting out, who work part-time like me, typically make $8,000 or less when they first start out. 

[00:40:22] TU: Per year. 

[00:40:22] KN: I work very part-time, and I make less than $8,000 a year, and I will probably say that. But it is in increasing, and I have negotiated $10,000 deals, $20,000 deals, and just the projects never went into production. So I’ve had great opportunities. But, oh, my gosh, the ups and downs of the gig economy are crazy. So I just want to point that out, and I would say you’re not going to make $100,000 right away, for sure. 

Then as an entrepreneur, I would say there’s a lot of risk, but you have to be smart about it. You have to not dump all of your savings into the shiny objects that you see. You got to have boundaries. If somebody says, “Oh, this microphone is the best in the business,” you find out what’s a starter microphone and see if you even like doing it. Yeah. If there’s anything else I can tell you, let me know because I’ll tell you. There are so many things, so many myths and misconceptions about voiceover industry alone. But entrepreneurship, I mean, gosh, I could go on and on about that, in general. Let me know what you want to know, Tim.

[00:41:36] TU: Smart risk resonates with me. I tend to have some shiny object syndrome myself. I think many entrepreneurs do, and it could be a new piece of equipment. It can be a new piece of software, right? And a new solution or course. I think one of the challenges as you continue to grow in your business journey and you grow your network and you talk with other people, inevitably, you come across conversations like the one we’re having, and someone may say, “Well, I use this tool or I use this software. I use this.” You’re like, “Oh, I need that,” right? I need that piece of equipment, that piece of software. So sometimes, the answer is yes. That’s going to be a valuable solution. But really taking smart risks and making sure you’re staying on course with the core offering and not getting distracted by that, I think, is really, really smart. 

Related to smart risk, I want to wrap up our conversation by bringing together the personal financial journey with your business journey. When I talk with a lot of aspiring pharmacy entrepreneurs, one of the hurdles that typically comes up is the intersection between the personal financial journey and being able to start the business with confidence. That could be because of student loan debt. That could be because they have a young family, and there’s lots of competing financial expenses. That could be because they feel like they’re behind on retirement, and they don’t feel like they’re in a financial position of strength to be able to lean into their business idea. 

So my question for you, as you started the journey in 2017, how did your personal finance plan intersect with your ability to start the business and to feel confident making that jump forward?

[00:43:10] KN: I love this question so much. When – Oh, boy. We took Financial Peace University, the Dave Ramsey class at our church in 2013, and that made a big difference in how we attacked debt. I would say that the mortgage payoff was in the horizon. Like we were almost there when I started my business. I started my business November of 2017, right at the end of the year. Then we paid off our mortgage March of 2019. 

Having that financial freedom and really, honestly, extra space in my mind to let myself dream about what could be was huge. So I would say we started off investing in our futures through 401(k)s and Roth IRAs early. Okay. My husband as soon as he got a job that had a 401(k), I believe he was at least doing employer match and then eventually maxing out. Currently, maxes out. I think 18,500 is his current contribution per year, and that’s the maximum, I believe, he’s allowed per some law. Right, Tim?

[00:44:28] TU: It’s up a little bit in 2022. I think it’s a little bit north of 20,000, 20,500. But he may –

[00:44:33] KN: Okay. I’m sure he’ll be there soon. 

[00:44:34] TU: I don’t know. But, yeah, he probably is. He probably is. Yeah.

00:44:37KN: Yeah. But then I had my Roth IRA that I started in college because we had a speaker come to class and during our management and marketing class. That guy, I just called him up afterwards and I said, “Hey, you want to be my financial planner,” and he did. He became my financial planner. His company is still my financial planning company 22 years later, and I have all that growth and that trust and that relationship.

[00:45:02] TU: So slow steps to building the financial plan. You mentioned in 2017, specifically, the business. Having that home paid off was a big part of feeling confident to have the margin to get the business off the ground. I think that’s great because I think some sometimes every business is different, right? If somebody is developing a product-based business or a business that requires a lot of inventory, there might be a lot more upfront costs. 

I think of what we started at YFP. I believe of what you’ve done as well. Certainly, some upfront costs but maybe not to the magnitude of a product-based business, where you may need to have some more upfront capital. But nonetheless need to have a solid financial foundation in place to be able to make that journey and to do it with confidence.

[00:45:45] KN: Yes. Thank you for summarizing that. I feel like there’s so many little details that I could bring up. But, yeah, I don’t know how much into the weeds you want me to get. I think that if somebody is going to take a risk, a calculated risk, and start a business, you need to do your homework. I did my homework to find out. Once I discovered the voiceover industry, can I afford to do this? I found out that the microphone that I wanted was only like 199 bucks. I needed a stand. But I needed training. It was like $200 a pop for an hour. I needed a demo. It costs X number of dollars. Without a mortgage, we had that available capital, and we were still investing. 

Yeah. Over time, the investments – I mean, if you are faithful and you have a good strategy, you will eventually get closer to your retirement goal. But you need to have a goal in the first place, and you got to start somewhere, and I highly recommend that Dave Ramsey Financial Peace University and also getting somebody that you trust to help you with your journey.

[00:46:50] TU: Great advice. Kim, this has been a lot of fun, and I appreciate you taking time to come on the show. Again, for folks that want to learn more about what Kim’s up to, you can go to thepharmacistsvoice.com and also visit kimnewlove.com, and keep up to date with the newest course that she’s working on starting a podcast. So, Kim, thanks so much for coming on the show.

[00:47:09] KN: Thank you for having me, Tim. Take care.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:47:12] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 278: YFP Planning Case Study #4: Selling a Pharmacy and Leaving a Legacy Before Transitioning Into Retirement


YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP®, to discuss selling a pharmacy and leaving a legacy before transitioning into retirement

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Robert Lopez, CFP®

Robert Lopez, CFP®, is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. Along with his team members, he helps YFP Planning clients on their financial journey to live their best lives. To go along with his CFP® designation, Robert has a B.S. in Finance and an M.S. in Family Financial Planning. Prior to his career in financial planning, Robert worked as an Explosive Ordnance Disposal Technician in the United States Air Force. Although no longer on active duty, he still participates as a member of the Air Force Reserves. When not working, Robert enjoys being outdoors, playing co-ed volleyball and kickball, catching a game of ultimate frisbee, or hiking with his wife Shirley, young son Spencer, and their dogs, Meeko and Willow. 

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP®, to discuss YFP Planning Case Study #4. In this case study, Tim, Kelly, and Robert delve into the financial details of a fictitious family, the Patels. Aman Patel is a 59-year-old independent pharmacy owner looking to sell his pharmacy to his daughter, Jessie. Jessie currently works on staff at the pharmacy. Amin’s wife, Hannah, is a teacher with questions about her retirement pension and social security claiming strategies. Amin and Hannah also own a rental property they are looking to sell and want to know how best to use the proceeds of that sale as they are approaching retirement. Together, Tim, Kelly, and Robert cover the details of the Patels’ retirement timeline. They dive deep into how the Patel family will need to coordinate with a CPA and an attorney to best structure the succession plan for the pharmacy with considerations for both Jessie, who has student debt, and themselves as pre-retirees. Lastly, they explain planning options for the Patel family’s investments and insurance policies as they approach their transition to retirement. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional, on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Hi, I’m Tim Baker, and today I chat with YFP Planning’s lead planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Robert Lopez, to walk through our fourth case study of a fictitious family, the Patels. 

Aman Patel is 59 and is an independent pharmacy owner, who was looking to sell his pharmacy to his daughter, Jesse, who currently works on staff at the pharmacy. We discuss the Patels’ retirement timeline and how they’ll need to coordinate with an attorney and CPA to best structure the succession plan to Jessie. Aman’s wife, Hannah, is 55 and works as a teacher. At retirement, she’ll receive a pension and has questions of how to claim it, along with how to claim Social Security. 

We also discuss questions about what they should do with their rental property and how they should handle the proceeds, whether they should pay down debt or invest. Finally, we discuss their investments and insurance policies, as they approach this very important transition. 

[EPISODE]

[00:00:57] TB: What’s up, everyone? Welcome to our fourth case study in our series. Glad to be back with you. We’re going to today go through the Patels. The Patels are going to be a little bit of a different case. So in the past, we’ve through a couple in their 30s, a couple in their 40s, a couple in their 60s. Now, we’re actually going to talk about Aman Patel and Hannah Patel, who are a couple in their 50s, who were actually a pharmacy owner. So I’m glad to welcome back Kelly and Robert to go through this case study. Guys, what’s going on?

[00:01:25] KRH: Doing well. 

[00:01:25] RL: Just staying cool out here in Phoenix.

[00:01:29] TB: Awesome. So let’s jump into our guy. So like I said, we’re going to be talking about the Patels and what they’re looking at as they approach retirement. So, Robert, why don’t you set us up, like we’ve done in previous cases, and kind of go through their overall demographic, what they’re looking at, where they live? Kelly, you’re going to get into goals and debt. Then I’ll kind of take us home with the rest of the balance sheet.

[00:01:50] RL: Yeah. So let’s jump right in. So we have Aman and Hannah Patel. So Aman is a pharmacy owner. He’s 59 years old. The salary he’s pulling out of the business is $150,000 a year. Obviously, as a pharmacy owner, he has no other income. That’s kind of his main source. His wife is a teacher. She’s 55. She makes $75,000 a year. Then she has some tutoring and support on the side, where she makes an additional $10,000 a year. They file their taxes jointly, and they are joining the pharmacy by their daughter, Jesse, who is a 29-year-old single pharmacist, who works through the pharmacy as well. 

They are residents of St. Paul, Minnesota. Their income numbers break down to a gross of $235,000, which breaks down to 19,005 monthly and roughly $9,500 net, beating after taxes, contributions, and insurance. So those expenses break down to roughly like a 40-20-40 fixed expenses, variable expenses, and savings. They’re living in a three-bedroom single-family home that they purchased back in 2005, when the prices were good, and it was a 30-year-mortgage at 5.75%. They were able to refinance in 2012, down to 3.5%, and they have about $155,000 left on that mortgage.

[00:03:04] KRH: All right. In terms of goals, they both want to retire in the next several years. Aman would like to sell the pharmacy to daughter, Jesse, and help her with that transition. Hannah will receive a teacher’s pension. So that is about $2,500 per month. But she doesn’t quite know how to claim that, how it works. Then also, knowing what their Social Security benefit might be as well is important. 

They are interested in no longer having a rental income property and would like to sell that, along with the pharmacy. But they are interested in staying in the St. Paul area. They have questions about paying off their debt, as they’re looking for that financial independence and retirement. Aman wants to golf more regularly and take those trips abroad, and Hannah wants to be more involved with charitable endeavors. They both want to help Jessie as much as possible, both as a new pharmacy owner, and she has some student loan debt as well. 

So the debt in question that we’ll be looking at is that there is still the home equity line of credit that looks like a balance of about 10,000. They’re paying aggressively on that, and it does have the interest rate of the 5%, as Robert mentioned. There is a car note of about 15,000. That has an interest rate of 4%. They’re paying 250 per month on that. Then they do have that mortgage payment for their primary residence, just under $1,400 for that and about 10 years remaining.

[00:04:41] TB: From a wealth-building perspective and, again, kind of bouncing back and forth between the net worth statement, they have about $50,000 in cash in the checking account and then another $75,000 in a high-yield savings account. They have a variety of investment accounts, Roth IRAs for both of them, 403(b) for Hannah, the SEP IRA that Aman has through the pharmacy, and then a taxable account that they’ve been contributing to. 

For the 403(b), Hannah has that, in addition to her pension. She puts about 10% in, which is about $15,000. She’s invested in balanced funds. Aman’s SEP IRA that he puts money into, he tries to target about $1,000 a month or $12,000 a year. He’s more conservative with his allocation. The Roth IRAs they’ve had in recent years contributed to, but they’ve stopped because they’re over the threshold for married filing jointly. Right now, they’re directing all those funds to their joint taxable accounts. So it’s about $1,400 a month or nearly $70,000 a year. Again, in terms of the allocation for the Roth IRAs, bounce more for Hannah, conservative more for Aman. Basically, the taxable account is going to be used to supplement their retirement. 

On the real estate perspective, they do have their primary home that they’ve purchased, and it’s worth about 395,000, with about 155,000 left on the mortgage. They have a rental property, which was their first home that they didn’t sell. Once they purchased the most recent one, that’s worth about 275,000 with no mortgage. Then Aman had did a recent evaluation on the pharmacy, and he thinks that the pharmacy is worth about 750,000. So that’s basically the balance sheet. 

From a wealth protection perspective, Aman has a $1.5 million term policy, life insurance policy that will expire at age 70. Hannah has one quarter of a million dollars that will expire at age 66. Aman has no short-term or long-term disability. Hannah has what she has through an employer, which basically covers 60% short term, 60% long term. Professional liability, Aman has his own policy. Then there’s the documents that definitely need to be dusted off, need to be updated and reviewed, especially with kind of the sale of the business upcoming. So they’re going to have to engage in attorneys for the sale and as the attorney to kind of get that rolling. 

From a tax perspective, Aman has an account he’s used for the last 10 years. Then they’re just concerned about how the taxes are going to be treated related to sell on the business. So they have to kind of navigate that. So miscellaneous things kind of makes additional income, as Kelly said, with school activities, and she might continue to do that post retirement. Cash flow and staffing issues are top issues during the transition. So I’m just making sure that the [inaudible 00:07:25] have the adequate staffing to make sure that Jesse is not killing herself initially. 

They have questions about, when do they – What’s the timing on the rental property? What do they do with the proceeds? Do they invest that? They’re kind of leaning towards more paying off the debt. Then Jesse wants to expand services at the pharmacy to increase lines of revenue. But Aman is less sure. So you kind of have that change management that they’re going to have to negotiate in terms of like who is the boss and when and what that looks like. 

So a lot of stuff going here, guys. Kelly, I’ll start with you. What would be some of the things that jump off the page for you in terms of what we need to tackle with regard to the financial plan?

[00:08:08] KRH: I mean, I guess the top priority would be the sale of the pharmacy, since it relates to funds they’d have available for retirement, also helping to take care of Jesse in the process as well. This certainly would speak to needing an attorney to be involved in some tax planning as well. But I guess one of the things to think through would be like how much – Jesse has student loans. Her resources might not be robust to do an outright sale, if the value of the pharmacy is $750,000. So sometimes, those family sales can be structured over time, deciding if there’s an interest rate or as part of it a gift. It would all be things that would be important to think about. 

It may be that smaller increments would be helpful for the family, in terms of planning as well, just to keep that tax liability for Aman and Hannah a little bit more manageable from year to year. So I guess that’s where I would start is getting some professional input to see what their options are, what an interest rate might look like, and how Jesse might be able to facilitate payment. That might also touch on the question of who’s making decisions. If it’s a partial buyout, if – I think those are always important things. Like the non-dollar and cents is just some of those logistics about how decisions will be made, who is going to be the board of directors, how to transition out. If you still have kind of a foot in the door, what does that mean in terms of your input and say?

[00:09:47] TB: Yeah. This is definitely one of those instances where as the CFP, I think you’re trying to quarterback in bringing different professionals because, obviously, from a legal perspective, from a tax perspective, an attorney, a CPA are going to have insight in terms of how to best structure this, and then kind of herd the cats along with a financial plan to see, okay, how does this all fit together? 

But, yeah, timing of like the sale. Is it a complete sale? Is it something that invests over time? How does the tax work in terms of capital gains on the sale of that? How do you structure a promissory note? Is there money down? Is Jesse taking less of a salary and doing more sweat equity? Or is she kind of being paid as an independent pharmacist would at a market rate? So those are all things I think that like those would be questions that bringing in other professionals to help kind of navigate that. 

Rob, I don’t know your take, but I think like three to five years, I think the time is now to start those conversations because I think it’s going to – Especially with an asset like this, it’s going to take longer than they think. So outside of kind of bringing in some of the professionals to start asking and answering some of these questions, what else would you want to know more about, whether it’s goals or what that looks like, with regard to their planning in kind of this transition that’s coming up?

[00:11:10] RL: Yeah. How much does he really want to work after that, right? So he’s 59 right now. Is he saying, “We’re going to stop working at 62 or 65.”? Is this a, “I want to have this transition started in three to five years.”? If he’s going to continue to work, especially helping her out, right? If she’s taking on the purchase of the business, she’s going to have to decrease expenses, and she may do that. Decrease that sweat equity, right? But she’s going to need help from a staffing perspective. 

So if he’s going to be working there into the future, then, yeah, the time is now to get that transition started. So that way, she can slowly take over, while he’s still accruing an income and then working on transitioning that business. I think a real perspective on not only when they want to sell the pharmacy but when he wants to fully retire will set that timeline from a payout perspective is what we are working with the lawyers and the accountants to decide what the timetable or the time horizon is for that buyout. That’ll factor in pretty strongly.

[00:12:07] TB: Yeah. I think like it could be one of those things, where if you’re doing some part-time staffing at a pharmacy that your daughter’s drawn in that you kind of built that, that might be a little bit more enjoyable in the later years of your career, where you’re not having to worry about payroll, or you’re not having to worry about management and things like that. Obviously, you’re mentoring your daughter. But maybe it just kind of takes a lot of the stress off of you, and it can extend your career. 

The thing that I would have bouncing around in my head is, okay, how can we structure this if it’s a seller finance and note that we can get paid enough to kind of get to that age 70, where Social Security – The strategy might be to delay that. Take money from the retirement accounts, delay Social Security, and then use that structured note as a way to kind of bridge that period. So I think those are the discussions in terms of like how long is that note going to be? What’s the interest rate to, Kelly, your point? If it’s not a market interest rate that that has to be considered a gift that we have to kind of track and make sure that we’re accounted for. 

So these are all things. I think it goes back to the goals, right? So like when do you see yourself getting out? Is that something where it’s a clean break? There’s a note in here about Jesse kind of wants to – She wants to expand services. Is Aman going to be on board with that, if he’s still majority owner, if it’s like a 50-50 thing? Or is it at this day, in January 1, 2028 or whatever it is, that they’re going to you, basically, hand the keys to Jesse, and then it’s going to be here’s the run. Those are all things I think to get on the table and flesh out to make sure it works for everyone. 

Kelly, what’s your take in terms of like – It sounds like they kind of want to simplify life. Obviously, passing on the ownership of the pharmacy to Jesse, they talked about selling the rental property and kind of getting out of the landlord game. What’s your take in terms of timing of that, what to do with the proceeds, etc.?

[00:14:15] KRH: I guess the timing of the sale of the rental property is a pretty well time to have this conversation with the way the housing market is at present. So I guess that’s always a factor, like depending on the urgency, like understanding the market factors in like is it now. Is it maybe wait a bit? We have at present such an interesting situation. We’re coming off like really high rates for purchases, low interest rates earlier in the summer now with the rates rising. So I guess that would be a component is kind of getting some professional advice about the market and whether now is the time. 

In terms of what to do with it, like I think it would be interesting to build out. I’ve heard you in the podcast, Tim, talk about the retirement paycheck. So kind of what do they need to have? That pension for Hannah adds a really nice resource, understanding at what year she gets what amount. If there are any other benefits from that pension would be good to know. Like are there any health care benefits, any disability, survivor benefits? So details there but then kind of looking at what’s coming in from the pension, getting their Social Security statements poured. 

Then you can took take a look at expenses and see like, okay, well, then I feel like then you’re looking at the debts and seeing like, well, what really does need to be paid off to make that paycheck work with the resources. The rate of the 5% is on the high side. So I like that they’re aggressively paying that off. That probably would be the top thing I would target. The car and the mortgage a little bit less. So but, again, depending on resource, if they really don’t want to have any payments, that does come back to personal preference. We can run some numbers. It’s probably a combination of the two. Like does the paycheck work? Do the financial numbers work? Just how they feel about having some debt going into retirement. 

[00:16:18] TB: Yeah. What’s not represented here is probably like what is the rental income that they’re getting from that. So obviously, giving that up for the potential of liquidating the 275,000, which was what we think it’s worth and then, again, how to apply that to the debt. To your point, I’m less concerned about that. I think maybe getting rid of the HELOC. Maybe the car note and then keeping the mortgage rolling could be kind of a balance. 

But right now, where the market is, is like if you have cash to potentially put in the market, now’s the best time to do it because of how depressed prices are. Again, not an advocate of timing the market, but it could be that we’ve lined up the sale along with – To Robert’s point, when we exit the pharmacy and kind of do it in one fell swoop. Or just kind of let the market drive it in terms of maybe you list it for sale or you try to rent it simultaneously and see what comes out. So I think there’s a little bit of give there. We don’t – There’s not an overwhelming need for cash, I think, as we as we sit here but definitely something to kind of, again, flesh out with regard to the plan. 

Robert, from an insurance perspective, is there anything that kind of jumps out here? Obviously, Kelly mentioned the pension. One of the things I did look up in Minnesota, if you’re a state employee, you do get Social Security as well. So she’ll have that. A lot of state employees don’t pay in Social Securities. They don’t have that benefit. So that’ll – She’ll kind of be able to get both. But in terms of like looking at the pension, looking at health care, Medicare, she has some life disability. Do you have any big concerns from an insurance perspective, as you’re kind of approaching this plan?

[00:18:01] RL: It’s hard to say kind of what that overall perspective looks like. I think their life insurance policies are in a good place right now. Aman’s going to go out till 70. She’s going to go till 66. She’s got the short-term long-term disability and Social Security disability benefits from them. He doesn’t have any disability benefits. But as a pharmacy owner with a daughter working there, you could probably finagle some work that you could still accomplish for an income. 

The professional liability is there. I’d be interested in starting to look at maybe some long-term care, depending on what the parents look like. What does mom and dad look like from then? Are they still around? Is this something that they’re going to have to care for? Then what that longevity looks like for Hannah and Aman. Are they going to be expecting to do some long-term care? Because as we approach that age 60, it starts to become more of a conversation of is this a policy we need to be looking into? But yeah. 

[00:18:51] TB: Yeah. I think the other thing – So if we look at – You kind of mentioned not having anything through the pharmacy. I think one of the things that is glaring is the lack of a 401(k) offering, which a lot of small businesses, independent pharmacies don’t offer. I think it’s because of like the expense related to 401(k)s. I think there are options out there. So that would be something that I would be talking too about them, once the dust settles or some of these initial things, is to kind of open up that bucket. So they can defer. Jesse could defer for herself. Even if Aman is planning to do that, it’s to kind of set up that bucket. So it’s another place to basically get retirement funds set aside. So I would definitely encourage that. 

In terms of the investments, obviously, they’re pretty conservative to balance between the two of them, which is not necessarily a bad thing to be three to five years from retirement. That’s probably fine. But when we get post retirement and kind of outside of the eye of the storm with [inaudible 00:19:53] risk, we’re going to have to adjust that once we get kind of everything rolling. 

But, yeah, I think the big thing here is really to start the conversations, if they haven’t already, and with the CPA, with the attorney, just to make sure everything is tracking to what they’re trying to do. I think the big thing that I would be talking to the two of them about is you got to make sure you’re taking – Anytime you have kids, it’s making sure you’re taking care of yourself and your retirement and not being, I don’t want to say, overly generous with the deal. But you want to make sure that it’s structured in a way that benefits both. 

I know you’re concerned about Jesse’s loans as well. But at the end of the day, we need to make sure that the retirement nest egg has longevity and that Aman and Hannah don’t have to go back into the workforce to kind of sustain their livelihoods. So a lot going on here. Anything else that you guys would call out with regard to the plan?

[00:20:49] RL: A good taxable investment that they’re doing, I think there might be a better use for that. Basically, it sounds like they took some of that mortgage money that they weren’t paying before, minus the property taxes, and they started putting it into a taxable account, which is a strong idea. Let’s have that money grow for us in the future. But I think if we’re putting that in 1,400 hours a month, that money – We could max out her 403(b). So let’s get that 403(b) maxed out. That brings down the adjusted gross income, which might even get us below or close to that threshold, where we could start making some sort of Roth contributions again.

They’re over 50, so they get a little bit of plus up, so using a little bit of gap there. So if we can get under that threshold, that would be a nice place to just get more money going towards the retirement, instead of in a taxable account.

[00:21:27] TB: That’s great point. So the catch up for the Roth IRAs, they could put up to 7,000. So 6,000 plus $1,000 catch up. Then for the 403(b), I think they have a special provision, where it’s 20,500. I think it’s an extra 6,500 for catch up. 403(b)s have kind of some special rules with regard to the catch up, but that would be another place to put dollars. I definitely want to see a balance of Roth, taxable, and pre-tax, which I think they have a good – But to your point, they probably could plus up more into Hannah’s, potentially open up the Roth IRA. I think they have a sizable enough taxable portion that if they needed to draw from that, in addition to IRAs, as they’re waiting to claim Social Security, there’s probably enough there to do that. Again, we’d have to model that out and see. But potentially, take advantage of the 403(b) while it’s there. So that’s a great point, Robert. Anything else that you guys would fall out here? I think we covered a lot of ground.

[00:22:29] KRH: I mean, I would agree with the investment assessment. I mean, even exploring backdoor Roths if they’re over the limit. At some point, you’ll model Roth conversions, potentially as well with other resources when the time is right. I guess the other thing with insurance too, if he does sell it, if Aman sells the pharmacy to his daughter, and there’s a buy-sell agreement, like often that involves insurance as well, if they’re partners and kind of just keeping an eye on that. 

[00:22:59] TB: Liability, cross purchase, key person, all of those things probably just need to be relooked at and potentially even bringing in an insurance professional to make sure that that’s all looking good. Yeah. So I think those are good points as well. 

Well, guys, I really appreciate the thoughts on this. I think a lot of work to do. I think a lot of coordination, obviously, with the sale of an asset, transitioning into retirement, working with family. There’s I think good constructive conversation to be had. So I appreciate your guys’ thoughts on this case study today, and I’m looking forward to doing the next one. 

[00:23:32] KRH: Okay. 

[00:23:32] RL: Sounds good. 

[00:23:33] KRH: Thank you.

[OUTRO]

[00:23:34] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 277: How This Pharmacist Teaches Financial Principles As a Preceptor and Parent


Dr. Frank McCabe discusses his career in pharmacy and how he teaches financial principles as a preceptor and parent. 

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Frank M. McCabe is currently a Pharmacist Consultant with over 37 years experience in the Healthcare industry. He received his undergraduate degrees from Orange County Community College-SUNY Orange (Business Administration) and MCPHS University-Boston (BS Pharm) and his graduate degrees, Masters in Business Administration (Management) from the West Point Military Academy Program (USMA) of Long Island University-CW Post Campus and Doctor of Pharmacy degree from MCPHS University-Boston. Dr. McCabe is a Board Certified Pharmacotherapy Specialist (BCPS). He has served as a preceptor to pharmacy students and pharmacy practice residents. Most of Dr. McCabe’s pharmacy professional experience was in Hospital Pharmacy, including leading one of Nations leading healthcare institutions (St. Joseph’s Health of NJ) acute care hospitals during the Covid-19 pandemic (St. Joseph’s Wayne Medical Center, Wayne, NJ). Dr. McCabe also has had experience in Community practice and Pharmaceutical Industry (Medication Safety and Pharmaceutical Sales Management/Data Management). Dr. McCabe is also a Certified NJ Consultant Pharmacist, which is recognized Nationally by the VA. He has extensive engagement in Professional Societies, including when practicing in New York State as Secretary for the Mid-Hudson Chapter of the NYS Council of Health System Pharmacists and over 10 years as Treasurer for the North Chapter of the New Jersey Society of Health System Pharmacists. Dr. McCabe was also a frequently requested speaker on Nutrition and Vitamins for Corporations and Community organizations in the North New Jersey area.

Episode Summary

This week, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by Frank McCabe, PharmD, BCPS, MBA. Frank is a pharmacist consultant with over 37 years of experience in the pharmacy industry. This week, Dr. McCabe discusses his career in pharmacy, how he caught FIRE early in his career, strategies he employed to allow his children to attend out-of-state schools with very little debt, and how he incorporated personal finance education into his rotational experiences for student pharmacists as a preceptor. 

Frank’s advice to younger pharmacists includes being active in professional societies for continuing education, networking, and helping the future generation of pharmacists. He also encourages younger pharmacists to look for opportunities and training, as he did, so that when opportunities in the pharmacy field present themselves, they may take advantage. He shares a reminder to take care of your mental and physical health while seeking opportunities to make additional income. Being conservative with spending and living frugally while paying off student loan debt can be balanced with putting money into your retirement accounts as well. For pharmacists in the latter part of their careers, Frank explains his view of the current time of financial challenges and high volatility during this period of his retirement. The episode closes with Frank’s strategies for educating student pharmacists and his children on financial principles. His methods include building an understanding of the value of hard work balanced with finding and enjoying your life’s passions.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:01] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, I had the pleasure of interviewing Frank McCabe, a pharmacist consultant living in Pittsburgh, with more than 35 years of experience as a pharmacist spanning institutional practice, pharmacy administration, and pharmaceutical industry. 

During the show, we discuss how he caught fire with personal finance early on in his career. Some of the strategies that he employed to allow his now adult children to attend out of state schools nearly debt-free. And why and how he incorporates personal finance education into rotation experiences for student pharmacists. 

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does and working one on one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fi only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about working one on one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. 

Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. Okay, let’s jump into my interview with Frank McCabe. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:27] LB: Frank, welcome to the show.

[00:01:29] FM: Thank you, Tim. Glad to be here. And hopefully we can help the next generation and admire what you’ve done with your financial pharmacist and being an entrepreneur. And it’s really much needed in our profession.

[00:01:42] TU: I really appreciate that. And I’ve been looking forward to this conversation. And just some background of how we got here, as you had reached out to me about purchasing a copy of the book Seven Figure Pharmacist because of a student that you were precepting and wanting to pay it forward. And that initiated a conversation. And we went back and forth with a few emails. 

And I quickly realized that you had a passion for, as you mentioned, training up the next generation, paying it forward, teaching some of the principles that have been so important to you in your own personal journey and your own career journey as well. And so, that’s what we’re going to be talking about here today. We’ll talk a little bit about your personal career journey in pharmacy. We’ll talk a little bit about your family journey and how you taught your children about money or still teaching children about money. 

[00:02:26] FM: Absolutely. 

[00:02:27] TU: And the work that you’ve done precepting students and thoughts that you have on teaching personal finance as a part of some of those experiential rotations. Let’s start, Frank, with your own personal journey and pharmacy. Where did you go to school? When did you graduate? And what drew you into the profession?

[00:02:43] FM: Oh, gosh. Tim, it’s a long journey. 37 faithful years ago. And actually, over 40. I was in the top 25% of my graduating class in high school. And in New York State, in Orange County. Applied to Albany College of Pharmacy. Didn’t get in. Oh, no. But I really admired my family pharmacist, Stanley Moroknek, who own Thrift Drugs in Monroe, New York. So, okay, I did what was convenient and easy to do. But it worked out real well. 

I went to SUNY Orange, the State University in New York, community college. Got a two-year degree in business. And you’ll see how that ties in later on. Completed my associate’s degree. Applied to Massachusetts College of Pharmacy, which is now MCPHS University, Northeastern College of Pharmacy. 

And what was unique about going to a SUNY school, I was guaranteed a spot in a four-year school. I got accepted at SUNY Buffalo for business. But really wanted to pharmacy. So I went off to MCPHS University. And so, I did my undergrad degree there, my Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy. Graduated in December of 1983 and came out into practice. Eventually, I did go on and earn an MBA and also a my PharmD.

[00:03:53] TU: Tell us maybe the cliff note version, 1983 to 2022. Tell us about your career journey, the different areas of the profession that you’ve been in and leading up to the work that you’ve done most recently.

[00:04:07] FM: Yeah, thank you, Tim. I work for CVS when I first graduated school. It was 13-hour days. No lunch. No dinner. No break. Because you were part of management. I graduated 160 pounds. After a year, I was 130 pounds. I said, “I can’t keep this up. I’ll waste away to nothing.” 

I took an opportunity to work for the New York State Office of Mental Health at a large inpatient psychiatric center. It had 1,000 patients when I started there. And that’s where I cut my hospital chops. Like, institutional pharmacy jobs. 

I realized that working there was very good for the patients. Worked with a great group of people. Pharmacists are just smart people and just great people to collaborate with. But also, had a yearning and a desire to do other things in pharmacy and to be a director and assistant director in New York State OMH, often mental health, you would have to have an advanced degree. 

At that time, the Continental Health Care Systems, we’re switching to pharmacy automation. Back then there was no computers, no clinical. It was all typing everything out. Going back years and years. And we visited one of the booths at the New York State Council of Health System Pharmacists. And I should weave in there, Tim. Still to this day, for most of my career, I’ve been active in professional societies. And that’s one way I do give back. And I really implore the younger generation to become involved, whether it’d be a community practice, or institutional practice society. Because you meet a lot of good people and you also have opportunities for continuing education and also to help the younger generation. 

It was through that meeting that I went back and realized I really needed to get an MBA. We were very fortunate at West Point, the New York State Military Academy, Long Island University. Had a program there for 30 years. It was half civilian, half military. Did 60 credits in 18 months while working full-time.

[00:06:05] TU: Wow! Wow!

[00:06:07] FM: And that gave me the opportunity, and my X as well. And I went into pharmaceutical sales, and rose through there. Became a district sales manager. But the industry changed after 2000. The regulatory climate changed. The political climate changed. 

But one thing that sales was very good for, and I think I say to the younger generation, everybody should do a stint in sales. You’re selling a product, but you’re also selling yourself, Tim. You need to articulate your ideas and things. 

And I’ll tie that in for when I was at St. Joseph’s Health, St. Joseph’s Health in northern New Jersey. And I was at St. Joseph’s University Medical Center for six years. It is the fifth busiest emergency room in the entire nation with over 170,000 ER visits a year. Clinically, it was great. Interacting with residents, the pharmacy residents, the clinical pharmacist. But you really need to be able to have opportunities. 

And along my career, besides continuing education, having an MBA, going back for my PharmD, you don’t know what doors are going to be open to you. And there was a management shake-up at St. Joseph’s, and I had the opportunity to become the manager, the pharmacist in charge, at our small facility, St. Joseph Wayne Medical Center. But nobody had figured this out, Tim. I have an MBA. I’m good with numbers. Most pharmacists are excellent with numbers. Nurses are not so good with numbers. But boy, they’re so good at other things and just have such admiration and appreciation for what they do.

But because of that MBA and that additional education, it paid off that many years later. I got my MBA in December of 1991. But here we are in 2018 and my career and realized that St. Joseph’s Health, between both facilities, we had $2.1 million in expired drugs. Not unusual. Probably on the higher side. But the only way you’re going to get a handle on that, Tim, is through automation. 

But also, I was responsible for – neither facility had other pharmacy upgraded in 40 years. We didn’t have any clean rooms. Hey, where are we going to get the money for this? And better yet, we need clean rooms. We need carousels. 

I saw Omnicell’s IVX. I don’t know if – Are you familiar with IVX at all, Tim? 

[00:08:35] TU: I’m not. No. 

[00:08:36] FM: In terms of sterile compounding. It’s a modular device that’ll go in the hood. It has a scale on it. It has a printer. It has a camera. And there’s a cloud library of the specific gravities of the active ingredients and the inactive ingredients. You’re checking that process. While the technicians are compounding, you’re capturing that for regulatory and legal purposes going forward. 

I went out – in fact, we came out here to cranberry, Pennsylvania, to Omnicell’s headquarters for their automation, and realized, “Hey, we can do this.” I was with my boss, Mike Cairoli, who’s now a VP at St. Joseph’s Health, and got a two and a half million-dollar contract signed. They don’t guarantee it anymore. But we also had guarantees of two and a half million dollars in savings over five years. 

I was able to go to the C suite at St. Joseph’s Health. And they’re second biggest provider of charity care in the state of New Jersey and very poor, but to get these contracts signed. And it’s because of my passion. And I tried to inculcate in my staff, whether it’d be the pharmacists or the technicians. And it was true, Tim. On a given day, a patient upstairs could be a colleague, could be a family member, be a friend. It’s our obligation and to practice at our highest level as pharmacist. But to do that, you need technology. I had the opportunity to do that. And also, appeared before the New Jersey Board of Pharmacy twice to educate the board on technology. 

And for reasons, and we wanted to be closer to family here in the Pittsburgh area, we relocated here. But St. Joseph’s Health, last March, the New Jersey Board of Pharmacy requires that a pharmacist be in the cleanroom or the compounding area when the technicians are compounding. But because of my background in sales, my MBA, always been trying to get educated, just not in our profession, but also outside our profession, St. Joseph’s Health was the first institution in the state of New Jersey to get approval and have a pilot once they’re up and running with their cleanrooms and Omnicell’s IVX to have the pharmacists remotely located outside still having line of sight with the technicians compounding, but not having to be in there. 

And the rationale for that, human beings, a simple matter of our head, Tim, you kick off 50,000 flakes of skin and bacteria. More people are introduced to that clean space, the risk of breaking that sterile compounding area. And also, if you had a pharmacist in there, as I talked to Linda Weitzel, the board president Anthony Rubinaccio, the Executive Director of Board of Pharmacy and other members of the board, that you could have 15 technicians compounding. But one pharmacist? How is that safe? 

If you look at that career progression, I would implore the younger generation. It’s tiring. You’re working. You get family. You have children. But always look for those opportunities to latch on to education, whether it’d be a formal education through advanced education, or certificate programs. Because you don’t know down the road where those opportunities are going to happen. And if you have the skill set and that education and training, when that door opens, you can step through it.

[00:12:04] TU: That’s really great, Frank. And it’s really cool to see the thread. One of the things you mentioned, which resonates with me a lot, is the importance of some of the sales principles that you learned, obviously, through the work that you did in the pharmaceutical industry. But as you mentioned, it’s not just about selling the product. It’s about selling yourself and some of the confidence that comes through that process. But I can see where that sales background comes to be when you’re in front of the C suite at St. Joseph and making a pitch. When you’re in front of the board of pharmacy, the New Jersey board, those are sales principles. You’re not, per se, selling a product. But you’re really bringing yourself forward and obviously making a pitch for what you want to do. Really cool to hear and see the thread throughout the journey that you mentioned. 

I want to shift a little bit and talk about some of your own personal financial journey, but also how you’ve been able to instill these principles not only within your own family, but also with students and others that you’ve precepted. And something that really stood out to me in our email exchange was how you instilled the financial knowledge in your children. And before we jump into that, I’m curious how and why did you get interested in personal finance? Was there a moment? Was it through the MBA training? Was it something that you’ve always had an interest in that you’ve always self-taught yourself? Where does your passion and interest around personal finance come from?

[00:13:21] FM: Good question, Tim. And you and I spoke about that a little bit before the recording. It really has to go back to my mom. She passed away just this past April. I miss her every day. On 93 years of age. But she was a bookkeeper, Tim. And a different generation. But her high school education at Walton High School in the Bronx really put her in good stead for lifelong earning ability. 

She reveled in telling us, children and grandchildren, the story of looking for – back in the old days, there was ads in newspapers. It was an ad for a Ford dealership. And back then, they only wanted a man. But she went and said I have the skills. And she got the job. 

I learned that a young age that from mom, genetically, but how to manage your checkbook. How to manage finances. But also, kind of like you, you were saying your mom and dad put up envelopes on the refrigerator. We didn’t have that sophistication. 

I’m the youngest of four. I have three older sisters. The other one is deceased. But we always have the ability to earn extra money. I would clean mom and dad’s car. Hey, if I need extra cash, you can go vacuum and clean their cars, clean the windows. And then we used to – maybe about a mile away, we grew up in a mountaintop in Orange County, New York, there was a convenience store at the bottom of the hill. But we would go buy candy and then resell it at a candy stand. I learned about the multiplier effect of money. 

And then I worked in food service for seven years, Tim, on the New York State Thruway while I was going to community college. And you name it, I did it. I was a cashier. And then I worked in the office on the weekends when I was doing my community college studies. You learn that early. 

And then off to MCPHS University, and mom and dad was very helpful. But I kind of ran out of spending money halfway through the year. We were at Emmanuel College, which was an all-girls Catholic college at the time, MCP, leased a dorm from them. I went off down the block to McDonald’s by Fenway Park and work to get some spending money. 

[00:15:36] TU: Yeah. I love it. 

[00:15:38] FM: Just had that drive and that initiative. But also, making sure I kept up academically as well. I think your question, it comes from genetics. It comes from a good mentor. And then also, the rewards of working and having goals. I’ve really admired our family pharmacist, Stanley Moroknek. I was an otitis media sufferer growing up. And he was just fantastic. I had a goal. And I needed the money. It’s, “Okay, I got to do the academics.” But it needs some spending money because I want to go to Fanueil Hall, or I want to go see a concert. That’s what I did, Tim.

[00:16:16] TU: We talked a little bit about before we recorded today that there’s some challenging times for new practitioners that are out there making this transition from a student pharmacist to the first decade of their career. The student loan debt is well known. We’ve talked about it extensively on the show. The numbers are somewhat mind boggling. North of $170,000 on average of student loan debt.

[00:16:39] FM: Oh, easy. 

[00:16:40] TU: Many, may be higher, private education, longer pathways of education. We’ve seen somewhat of a flattening and stagnation of wages. We’re in a high inflationary period. Pharmacists, certainly still, relatively speaking, make a good income. But many folks may have a ceiling on that income. My question for you, as we think about the next generation of pharmacists and those that are listening, is there a piece of advice or two, Frank, that you would share now looking back 37 plus years of your career? Things that you learned along the way or words of wisdom that you wish you would have had early on that could be helpful to those that are in the front half of their career?

[00:17:19] FM: You have to look at self-help, Tim, in terms of your mental health and your physical health. You’ve got to take care of yourself first. But I think what is put me in good stead over the years is taking the opportunities for overtime. And also, the skill set. Though, here I am a hospital pharmacist, and then a hospital pharmacy manager. But there’s a small chain of independent pharmacies in North New Jersey. And I would add – I get a phone call during the day, “Hey, Frank, can you work tonight.” I would ask the younger generation, besides working 40 or 45 hours a week, whatever your primary job is. And if you have that debt, is to pick up additional shifts elsewhere. 

I know as a hiring manager at St. Joseph’s Health and a short stint here at Allegheny Health Networks, it’s very difficult to find qualified, competent hospital pharmacists. If somebody’s working in community practice, pick up a hospital shift or two as a per diem pharmacist. And that’s one way you can make a transition to hospital pharmacy. 

But what was nice about hospital pharmacy, I work shift work. And at St. Joseph’s, they were a little unique. My shifts were 6:30 to 3:00. I always had my – 90% of my evening is free. I could pick up if somebody called me and they needed coverage on one of the stores that night. 

And funny enough, at St. Joseph’s Health, Monday nights were the biggest nights for call outs. 99% of time, I’d pick up extra shifts. And also, besides earning money, Tim, I’ve always driven my vehicles in excess of 100,000 miles. Even here I am today mostly retired, I am driving a Subaru that’s got 175,000 miles. Can we afford to go buy another car? Sure. But it’s the principle that matter. I don’t need that new flashy thing. 

But also, it’s also putting money into the 401k, and making sure, at a minimum, you’re getting that match. So many institutions or corporations, you don’t have a traditional pension plan. St. Joseph’s Health, they had what was called the church plan. There were lawsuits. But come next year, I’ll be getting a small pension from them. They had switched to a 403b. As soon as they switched with that, they had grandfathered the pension plan. But I started putting money into that 403b. 

And even despite the downturn in 2008, Tim, I did nothing. I let it ride. Because I believe in the stock market historically. Part of the conversation you and I talked about was it’s not what you earn. It’s also what you save. Try and live frugally. 

And also, another way that I do that, another passion of mine, and that may be for a little bit of another segment of our discussion today, Tim, I had the opportunity at St. Joseph’s Health to present and lecture to corporations and community groups over 30 times on supplements and nutrition. Where that ties in terms of your own personal health and well-being, I would bring my own food to work. 

Not only wasn’t that frugal and savings, but it was always available to me. I didn’t have to go to the cafeteria. I made sure that what I was getting was healthy. I never understood about hospital institutional cafeterias selling deep fried chicken and French fries. But they do.

[00:20:46] TU: They do. Well, and I think the frugality message there I think is really important. Maybe a word that my generation doesn’t love necessarily. But I think, frugality, it’s important to remember. It’s not just about the dollars and what we do with those dollars. Certainly, that’s very important, whether we’re paying down debt, or investing, or saving for the future. But it’s also about the momentum and the mindset. 

Here you are nearing retirement. You’ve had a successful career. And you share that, after this interview, you’re going to be working on your Subaru, which is 170,000 miles plus. So, you can keep that thing going and not have to buy another car. And could you? As you mentioned, yes, you could. But it’s that mindset and that momentum that transcends any one financial decision, right? I always say it’s not just about the used car. It’s about the mindset with a used car, which then transcends your ability to save, your momentum to save, and the ability to move towards other financial goals. 

One question I’d have for you, Frank, especially for pharmacists listening that are maybe in the latter part of their career, here we are in a very challenging, volatile time period of the market. You mentioned, you’re mostly retired, how are you viewing this time period? You’ve done all this work to accrue your assets leading up to retirement. And here we are in a very challenging time period. But you’ve always had this long-term view of investing. Just take us inside Frank’s brain in the moment as someone who’s nearing retirement and how you’re viewing this high volatility period as you’re approaching a time where you may need to draw upon those funds.

[00:22:21] FM: One point that is unique in my situation, Tim, that helps me a lot, my wife, Marge, is a retired public school business administrator for the state of New Jersey. And she continues to work. In fact, she’s doing CE today. But I have her health benefits. That affords some flexibility. 

Do I get worried about the market? Yes. But I lived through the downturn in 2008. I have my 401k monies, my 403 monies, in lifestyle funds. As you go through time, they’re morphing more towards bonds. I’ve seen the growth in my retirement funds from 10, 15 years ago. And also, because I was in pharmaceutical sales, and I worked for GlaxoSmithKline, when I left their employ, I left my 401k monies there, because they pay – It’s a much bigger corporation. Lot more monies. 

At some point, I will have to consolidate this. But a lot of the fees they’ve paid to manage those funds. That has allowed my money to grow. I think that the days of staying with an employer for 30 or 40 years is rare. I think for the younger pharmacist is, okay, don’t panic. Leave the money. And then at some point – it’s a little bit of a hassle sometimes to tie that money together to roll it over. But you don’t want to take that out. 

If you need money –I can. And I looked before I started with Allegheny General Hospital last year, within 14, 10 miles of my house, I think there’s 14 independent pharmacies, Tim? And you’re looking at, from my knowledge, the first pharmacist in the history of the state of Pennsylvania, because of my perseverance and persistence to get his immunization licensed by reciprocity. They’ve never done that before. I would say to the younger generation, believe in yourself. Follow through. But it takes a lot of work. 

I sent 30 pages of documentation to the board here in a pandemic. Okay, I didn’t get my education training for immunization. It was back in 2013. No, it’s not two years ago, like the board requires. But I’ve been immunizing up until then. I think tying in financially, and that long view outlook is that persistence and perseverance. Believing yourself. Taking care of yourself. Eating right. Getting exercise.

[00:24:53] TU: Yep. And letting the time value of money do its thing, right? You live through a couple of steps. And one thing I was sharing recently with some folks is I graduated in ’08. And for folks that have graduated somewhere around that time period, or since then, this is really the first test of that long-term view and philosophy that we talk about. 

And it’s one thing to say it. It’s another thing to live it, especially for folks that have maybe been saving for 12, 13 years. You look at your portfolio, it could be down 20%, 25%, 30%. But to hear from folks such as yourselves that have lived through these dips. And we know the history. If we look at the market since the Great Depression, this is not unique. It’s happened before. The reasons are different. But this is not unique. And this is why we’ve got to have that long-term view of investing and make sure that we’re keeping that long-term view in mind.

[00:25:43] FM: I agree. I agree. And one thing we left out of there, and maybe that’s another segment, is also real estate.

[00:25:49] TU: Mm-hmm. Tell me more. Is that been a part of your journey?

[00:25:52] FM: It has been. Yeah, I’ve not been a real estate investor in the sense of some people could do it if you have the stomach for it. It’s just not my personality. But some people do get investment properties and rent out. But I’ve been a homeowner since 1986. And this is probably my fifth home. I don’t own the other homes. But the market long-term has been good. Because the current structure, it’s a little bit different especially living – Well, we lived in – Pennsylvania can be higher in taxes, but New Jersey certainly was one of the highest in the nation. And that limit would solve taxes. But getting that home equity over the years, and sweat equity. 

For me, Tim, growing up in high school, I took power mechanics and woodworking. And I worked with my hands. And I find that relaxing. But now, gosh, the younger generation, don’t forget YouTube. You can learn how to hang a drape. You can learn how to do a minor Plumbing Repair, do those kinds of things. I would also suggest that the younger generation, when they can afford it, is to get into their own home. 

And I kind of laugh, but I don’t want to laugh. Mortgage rates are at 5%, right? 

[00:27:08] TU: That’s right. 

[00:27:09] FM: But historically, my first home was like 13%. 

[00:27:11] TU: Yeah. Perspective, right? 

[00:27:13] FM: And our current home, Tim, we have a mortgage. We don’t need it. But it’s a 2.375%. We’re using somebody else’s money. You think of that time value of money, as you talked about, and how you deploy those assets, how you deploy your savings, how you deploy your long-term goals.

[00:27:34] TU: Frank, let me put myself in the shoes of a student on rotation with you, and you’re teaching me all these things, time value of money, and home appreciation, and equity in the home, and all the things long-term. And I hear all that. And I’m like, “Frank, that’s great. But I’ve got $200,000 in student loan debt. Homes are at crazy prices right now. Pharmacist income is relatively flat.” If we get tangible for a moment, it really comes down to we need to live off of less than we make so that we can create the cash flow to be able to allocate money towards these longer-term goals. 

And so, what does that look like? I’m a new graduate. I’m a transitioning graduate. What are the principles that I’m putting in place that allow me to live that discipline lifestyle so I can live off of less than I make and I can ultimately try to really save and invest the difference?

[00:28:24] FM: Tim, I don’t think it’s dissimilar to high school education today. Nevermind college graduates and pharmacist graduates. They fill our heads with so much clinical knowledge, and it’s great, and it’s a value to the patients that we serve. But I don’t think the schools are doing a good job in terms of what is this tuition mean. 

And when you’re going through, try and be frugal student. But now here, you graduate, and you said the average is $170,000 in debt? Well, how the heck am I going to get out of this debt? Well, you got to have a job. You get your primary job. 

Also, do a time value analysis. You can go to bankrate.com. You can use Excel. And I’ve done that with my students that, “Okay, here’s your debt. What do you think the current interest rate is going to be? What’s your minimum payment going to be?” Nevermind how do I get rid of this debt? 

And the students that I talked with, the schools have not done a good job of providing them with resources and information. They’re smart enough. Heck, hell, yeah. Yeah. We’re two percenters, Tim. Do you know what I mean by two percenters?

[00:29:29] TU: In terms of the 2% that are applying? Or what are you referring to?

[00:29:33] FM: No. Only about 2% of the US population has doctoral level degrees. 

[00:29:38] TU: Oh, okay. 

[00:29:39] FM: It’s probably evenly split between professional degrees like MD, PharmD, and PhDs. Let’s face it. You get through pharmacy school, they’re smart people. But they’ve just not gotten a sense. It’s like, “Oh my gosh.” And I think what I’ve done, and I think any graduating pharmacist can do, once you get that job, is hopefully you’re eligible for overtime. If not, you pick up extra shifts. Find another job. Maybe it’s outside of your passion or what you’re doing. But there’s usually – because there’s no benefits involved. 

I know probably – I’m 99% sure, Tim. I go and throw my CV around within 10 miles of here, and somebody’s looking [inaudible 00:30:25]. I’ll pick it up. 

[00:30:28] TU: Yup, absolutely. 

[00:30:28] FM: Yeah. I wouldn’t say, “Okay, I got this debt. What’s my minimum payment? What’s my maximum payment?” Because that’s going to impede their ability to get a mortgage, to buy a car. Got to pay for benefits out of your paycheck, for health insurance. But also, if there’s a retirement plan, you want to make sure you maximize that. Because the time value of money, you graduate ’24, ‘25. And you’re going to retire. Let’s say they raise social security to 68. Oh, boy! The value of compounding that. And you could do that through easily on bankrate.com. If I put 50 bucks a paycheck, times 52 weeks, and do that over 30 or 40 years. But you need to – Yeah, I can do vancomycin dosing. But nobody’s taught me how to do this.

[00:31:20] TU: Yeah. No. It’s so true. And I think there’s a gap. We’ve been fortunate to partner with over 40 colleges and to do some personal finance education. Often, those are one-off sessions. But for several of them, we’ve seen individuals at the dean level that have really bought into, “Hey, we need to be doing this and doing this longitudinally for our students.” 

And what I love hearing preceptors like yourself doing this, it needs to continue from the didactic curriculum to the experiential curriculum. And obviously, my hope is even post-graduation associations and others will pick up some of the education as well. And then we need to pass it on and pass it back, so that when we’re precepting students, we’re able to help them in their own journey. 

And step number one is often just that awareness. You give the example of student loan debt and the calculator. And before we can put a plan into action, we have to know what we’re working with. And so, $170,000, as I’ve said on the show before through my own journey, that feels like Monopoly money. But when you look at it as a monthly payment, and what does this actually mean? Okay, this starts to become real. Now we can put a plan in place. 

And we first have to accept that, yes, pharmacists might make a good six figure income, but you’re not taking home six figures, right? And this is simple math. We all know this. But students may not be thinking about that. Or what is the actual take home amount? And coming down a little bit off of the high of that, and then looking at what’s that going to mean in terms of bills, mortgages, student loan expenses. And really starting to work that budget so we can make sure we’re achieving those longer-term goals.

[00:32:54] FM: And I think, Tim, sometimes you look at that big figure of 170,000, you throw up your arm. 

[00:32:59] TU: That’s right. Yup. 

[00:33:01] FM: But so often, you got to slice that pie. Here’s the pie for food. Here’s the pie for the rent. Here’s the pie from a student loan. Okay, I can do this on my salary. But I don’t want to be paying this off for – I want to get a house. I want to go on vacation. How am I going to accelerate this? And I think the way to do it is you have no choice. I think you’ve really got to pick up an additional job. And that’s okay, because it’s a sprint. You get through that. Get that loan paid off. And then you can start doing what you really want to be doing.

[00:33:37] TU: Frank, one of the things you shared with me is that your daughter became debt-free at the age of 28. Your son, very small amount of debt. He’s an engineer for Tesla. And so, for me, as a father of four young boys running YFP, teaching them about personal finance is a really important topic. And I’ve tried a few different things with my kids. And it’s been interesting to see some of the behaviors and habits that they’re picking up on. As you look at now, parenting adult children, I would guess this journey never ends, right? In terms of teaching and – 

[00:34:08] FM: Tim, it never ends. Parental love. And I just talked to my children last night, and it’s just you think and worry about them, and frighten them every day.

[00:34:19] TU: Yeah. What worked for you? As you look back on that journey, and teaching your kids about money, what were some of the strategies that you employed, or even things that you’re currently employing? For folks that are listening that maybe have younger children or perhaps will have children into the future, what are some of the strategies? What are some of the tips when it comes to teaching kids about money?

[00:34:40] FM: I think it starts off with, Tim, that my ex and I are both pharmacist and believe in higher education. And also, believe that idle hands are the devil’s hands. And there’s a cost associated with that. But we always kept our kids busy, even if we’re both working parents. It might be after care, during the school year, going to parochial school, and during the summer, going to enrichment camps. But that also tied in. 

My daughter, she played town rec ball, high school basketball, AAU basketball. And she went on to the University of Massachusetts at Dartmouth for sculpture and graphic design. And she played division three basketball. And that was her passion. As parents, we didn’t expect her to get a part-time job. 

But my son had the good fortune, from Montclair, New Jersey to get accepted. We lived in Cedar Grove, New Jersey. But by taking the train, the path into New York City every day, he got accepted into Xavier high school in Manhattan. And that’s a Jesuit school, all boys. But also, by getting accepted, he also got the Sons of St. Patrick’s scholarship. And that required him to work. 

He worked at a mom and pop local gardening store all four years. Of course, I was beneficiary, because I got the shrubs for half price. I did some of my own landscaping. You know, sweat equity. Both children, they learned to work hard and be passionate through different avenues. 

I’m wrestling my daughter being academically, getting scholarships, but also working hard. She was never a star player, but she really enjoyed it. And living in New Jersey at the time, both kids went to state schools out of state. You’re paying out of state tuition. We just buckled down. I picked up extra shifts so I didn’t have to eat pork and beans. But we, me and my ex, paid a majority of their education. 

But you were talking – And this is not that long ago, Tim. It was $30,000 a year tuition, room and board. They both have cars. You’re talking $50,000 a year each. Marissa graduated with, I think, about $8,000 in loans. And she has paid those. And then Matthew had about 17,000. That was it, from Purdue University. And he’s down to 5000. And he’s in no rush, because there’s been no need.

It’s teaching your children the value of money younger, of hard work. Also, following your passions. Marissa is probably lifelong – She’s had some injuries. But she goes to the gym. I was a skier. My son took to snowboarding like a fish to water. And also, mountain biking. It’s not just teaching your kids the value of money and hard work, Tim. But it’s also introducing them to sports activities they can do lifelong and be healthy. Because not only just physically healthy, but mentally healthy. Both of my children, yeah, when I talk with them, they go to the gym, they do hiking. Matthew just loves being out in Reno, Nevada, because he’s an hour and a half from the Sierra Nevadas. And buys the epic pass and whatever passes, and every time he can when he’s not at work.

[00:38:10] TU: Tough life, huh? Tough life out there. Yeah. I love, really, the message of work. I think so often, for good reasons, we talk about strategies, like, 529 accounts, and saving, and scholarships, and cash flowing it, and all of those have value. But one of my hopes with my boys is, sure, we’d love to help where we can financially, whether that’s 529 accounts, whether that’s guiding them to scholarships, whether that’s cash flowing it. The expense so they’re not burdened with the debt. But also, there’s a lifelong lesson that comes from that hard work component, right? And that is something that transcends any type of transfer of here’s $10,000, from a 529 account. That’s great. But the lifelong lesson of the hard work that can come from that is going to have a much, much bigger return on investment. I think that’s a great reminder. And I’m grateful that you shared that.

Frank, my last question for you is I suspect we have many pharmacists listening that have students on rotation with them, residence on rotation with them, and perhaps have thought before, “How can I incorporate this topic of personal finance into the rotation? Into the learning experience?” 

And I’ve actually had a handful of people email me over the past couple years that are doing some cool things around this topic. And so, my question is, for you, that others might be able to adopt or build upon, what have you done, practically speaking, with students around the topic of personal finance that others might be able to apply in their own situation?

[00:39:41] FM: What I’ve done – and I just did it with Jordan. As you know, I bought a gift. And we’ve got to get together. I’ve been so busy. But I did reach out to him. I do have your book. And within the next couple of weeks, him and I will get together. But one of the first things we did, I have no – Hey, when are you going to graduate? Depends what year they’re in. How much money do you have in loans? And what does that mean? Here’s that dollar figure. What are your plans for paying that back? How are you going to pay it back? 

You introduce them to tools, whether through Excel or bankrate.com. And make a realistic, concrete example of what their payment is going to be when they graduate? And what jobs are available to them? And also, suggest, and try, and push, and prod, and share with them what I’ve done and what’s been successful for me. 

And my mom, at a young age, she – They said, “Well, how are you going to be successful in college?” Well, I like nice things, Tim. Nice things doesn’t necessarily mean new, shiny things. But it means the ability – my days off, I want to go skiing. I want to go mountain biking. It’s putting concrete things to that student and saying, “How are you going to get there and follow your personal passions, as well as your professional passions?” But also, because it’s become so competitive, Tim, I also encourage the students to become board certified.

[00:41:10] TU: Yeah, another credential that can help there. And I love the angle of the passions, right? Because one of things we often talk about is that a good financial plan – Yes, we need to be taking care of our future self. Yes, we need to be planning for retirement. But we also have to make sure we’re living a rich life today, right? Throughout. There has to be this balance between the two. 

And I think that connects and makes the topic come alive, especially as we’re talking about working with students, that when I talk about 401k accounts, 403b accounts, Roth IRAs, HSAs, insurance policies, those are tomorrow things in their mind. 

[00:41:45] TU: That’s Greek. That’s Greek. 

[00:41:46] TU: Right. Exactly. Yeah, it’s overwhelming. It’s confusing. But what’s right in front of them are student loans. I’m thinking about buying a home. There’re these things that I haven’t done for the last six or eight years when I’ve been in school that I’ve enjoyed that were hobbies or passions that I haven’t done that don’t want to do again. And so, being able to really lean into those areas that they can resonate with, that they can hook on to, I think can really help make the financial plan come alive. 

And then from there, take those jumping points, right? To talk about time value of money. To talk about Roth IRAs, and 401k’s and HSAs. But we’ve got to often meet the learner where they are, and then take them on the journey towards the future as well. 

[00:42:24] FM: Yeah, absolutely, Tim. Yeah, because they’re going to be with you for many weeks on rotation, for 8 weeks. You don’t need to bludgeon them over the head day one. But just bring that into the conversation.

[00:42:36] TU: Yeah. Well, it’s great. And one of the ideas we’ve had for a while that has just hit the backburner, among other things, is coming up with a preceptor toolkit of sorts around this topic. I’ve taught a personal finance course at a couple universities that we can use as a jumping point. But if there’s any preceptors out there listening that would like to join me and put something together that we could perhaps share with others, I suspect that we all have different resources or tools that would be helpful, shoot us an email, [email protected]. And we’d love to get a small group together to talk about this further. 

Frank, thanks so much for taking time to come on the show to share your journey, the wisdom with the next generation of pharmacists. Really appreciate it. And your mindset towards paying it forward. Thank you so much.

[00:43:18] FM: Tim, thank you so much for having me. And I’m looking so forward to some people, pharmacists, viewing this and latching on to an idea. And your good hard work that you’re doing is just much needed in the profession. Hats off to you.

[00:43:32] TU: Thank you so much. I appreciate it. 

[OUTRO]

[00:43:34] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the date publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacists.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacists podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 276: Why Giving, Philanthropy, and Serving Are Core Parts of This Pharmacist’s Financial Plan


Why Giving, Philanthropy, and Serving Are Core Parts of This Pharmacist’s Financial Plan

Sarah Adkins, PharmD, discusses how and why she started a non-profit pharmacy, why giving and philanthropy are a core piece of her financial plan, and how pharmacists can get involved using their expertise to help others.

About Today’s Guest

Sarah Adkins is a pharmacist and a native of Athens County, Ohio. Sarah attended Albany Elementary through the 8th grade. She moved with her family into the city of Athens and graduated from Athens High School in 1993. She attended the University of Toledo and graduated in 1998 with a Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy. She worked for Meijer Pharmacy in Northwest Ohio for two years after graduation. She then moved to Columbus, Ohio, and worked for Medco Health Solutions as a Customer Service Pharmacist, Managed Care Pharmacist, Supervisor of Physician Service Center, and then Knowledge Manager of Medication Therapy Management. She attended The Ohio State University College of Pharmacy (OSU COP) and completed her Doctor of Pharmacy in June of 2010. She moved back to her hometown of Athens, Ohio in 2011. She completed a PGY 1 residency in a collaborative agreement of clinical and academic practice with OSU COP and Ohio University Heritage College of Osteopathic Medicine (OUHCOM). After the residency, Dr. Adkins advanced her residency into a full-time shared position with OSU COP and OUHCOM where she has worked for the past 10 years. She precepts fourth-year Ohio State pharmacy students on rotations. She had the vision to build a non-profit pharmacy for the community in southeast Ohio. She now serves as the interim Executive Director of Rising Suns Pharmacy. She also spends clinic time with OhioHealth Family Practice residency clinic and partners with the Ohio University Heritage Community Clinic. She teaches pharmacy sciences at OUHCOM and Ohio University College of Health Sciences and Professions (CHSP). She is passionate and dedicated to her communities in Appalachia, Ohio, Southeast Ohio, and Athens.

Episode Summary

This week, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by Sarah Adkins, PharmD. Sarah is a pharmacist with over 20 years of experience, including time spent in community practice, managed care, ambulatory care, and academia. Sarah shares the start of her vision of a non-profit pharmacy, her passion and dedication to providing healthcare services to communities in Appalachia, Ohio, Southeast Ohio, and Athens, and why giving is a core part of her financial plan.

In 2011, after spending time at the free clinic at Ohio University and touring the Charitable Pharmacy of central Ohio, Sarah set her sights on bringing a non-profit pharmacy to Southeast Ohio, where there is a great need. After spending years expanding existing services to the area and vying for buy-in from colleagues and vested parties, Sarah took the reigns and got started. In 2019, the board for Sarah’s non-profit pharmacy was formed, 501c3 status was attained, and with diligence, the non-profit pharmacy garnered $110,000 in grant funding for startup costs. In the Spring of 2022, Rising Suns Non-Profit Pharmacy officially launched and to date, has been able to fill over 400 prescriptions and over $130,000 in drug costs. Sarah shares how with competing interests for both her time and money, she makes giving a priority and how other pharmacists can do the same.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had the pleasure of sitting down with a friend and colleague, Sarah Adkins. In addition to being an incredible human being that has impacted so many, Sarah has over 20 years’ experience in the profession of pharmacy, including in community practice, managed care, ambulatory care, and academia. She currently works in a shared position between Ohio State University College of Pharmacy and Ohio University College of Osteopathic Medicine. 

She also spends clinic time with OhioHealth Family Practice Residency Clinic. 

In 2020, she realized the vision to build Rising Suns Pharmacy, a nonprofit pharmacy for the community in Southeast Ohio, where she serves as the Interim Executive Director. During the show, we talked about how and why she started a nonprofit pharmacy, the origins of her passion and dedication to provide health care services to communities in Appalachia, Ohio, Southeast Ohio, and Athens, why giving and philanthropy are a core part of her financial planning goals, and how other pharmacists can get involved in using their expertise to serve others.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s jump into my interview with Sarah Adkins. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:50] TU: Sarah, welcome to the show. 

[00:01:52] SA: Thanks, Tim. It’s good to see you. 

[00:01:54] TU: Well, I am so excited for this interview. We had a chance to reconnect a few weeks ago, but we have known each other for a while. I think we’ve crossed paths initially through the Ohio State Pharmacy and Residency circles and through the Ohio Pharmacy circles. So excited to be able to share a little bit about your career story, the work that you’ve done to start a nonprofit pharmacy, Rising Suns. 

Really, the theme of today’s episode is around giving and philanthropy and really just an incredible story of what you have done throughout your journey. So before we get into that, give our listeners some background on you. Where did you go to pharmacy school, and what really drew you into the profession of pharmacy to begin with?

[00:02:36] SA: Oh, that’s a great question. So I literally have wanted to be a pharmacist since I was in the second grade. I know it’s weird. That doesn’t happen all the time. I know. But my sister was ill. My sister had actually kidney failure as a young child, and I had allergies. So we went to the doctor a lot, and it’s funny because we used to go to the prescription shop in Athens, here in Athens, Ohio. When we would go in there, my mom would say, “You know what, Sarah? Pharmacy is a really good job for a woman. I think that’d be a great job for you. You like science. You like math. You can make good money. You can live independently if you needed to.” I was like, “All right.” So I was like, “Okay,” and that was like the second grade. So since the second grade, I have wanted to be a pharmacist. I ended up going to pharmacy school at the University of Toledo. 

[00:03:24] TU: Go Rocket. 

[00:03:25] SA: How about that? A lot of people forget that. Like they think I went to Ohio State. So I got my doctorate at Ohio State. But I did my undergrad at University of Toledo. Anyway, I went to UT and I graduated actually in ‘98. So even when I graduated at that time, I told my mom, I was like, “Meds are so expensive.” I was like, “People don’t have access to medications, and they’re so expensive.” This was in ‘98. This was a long time ago. I was like, “People are dying because it can’t get access to medicine. It’s only going to get worse.” 

So I would say it even started maybe at that time. Anyway, I graduated in University of Toledo. I graduated there in ‘98. I actually worked for Meijer Pharmacy. I floated in Northeast – Excuse me, Northwest Ohio, around the Toledo area for a couple of years. Then I ended up moving to Columbus. I actually at that time worked for Medco Health Solutions, which is now Express Scripts. I did work there for around 12 years. I worked my way up. 

During that time, I wanted something more clinical. So I went back to school, and I had an opportunity to get my nontraditional PharmD is what we called it. So I worked full-time, and I went and got my PharmD at Ohio State University. I graduated there with my doctorate in 2010. I wanted to teach and do something more clinical. So I needed to get my PharmD in order to make that happen. So that’s a little bit about me. I’m sure I’ve missed some things.

[00:04:48] TU: No, that’s great. I think that was one of the things I wanted to talk through for just another moment was that decision to go back and get your PharmD. I know there’s not many. I think there’s maybe just a couple out there now. The nontraditional PharmD programs at the time, Ohio State, had a distance-based program. 

But big decision, right? You’re 10-plus years in your career. You’ve had experiences in community practice. You’ve worked your way up in managed care. Then you make this decision to go back to pharmacy school, plus residency, at Ohio State. So primary motivation around that was really that desire to teach and needing that door to open. Tell us more about that.

[00:05:22] SA: So I got kind of tired of what I was doing, and I think everybody does. I think we all hit that point when you just need to change. So I had been with Medco for a while and was looking for something more clinical. I was like, “I just really need something more clinical.” So I actually started looking for jobs and realized that my RPh, my BS in pharmacy was not going to get me something more clinical. So I started looking around and I thought, “I don’t think I’m going to be eligible for work in the jobs that I want without my PharmD.” So I started looking around, okay, what would it take to get the PharmD. 

Actually, at the time, right, I think it was a good time then. Medco actually paid for 75% of my degree. 

[00:06:05] TU: Wow. 

[00:06:05] SA: So as I was – Yeah. It was kind of a no-brainer. I was like, “Okay, it’s going to be two to three years of nontraditional time, and I would get my PharmD at the end. It was only – I actually paid cash for it because I was working full-time and going to school, which when I was in my – I was in my early 30s, and I had a lot of energy then. I think I only got maybe like two to three hours of sleep at night. 

[00:06:31] TU: Oh, my goodness. 

[00:06:32] SA: I guess I was that dedicated. I would oftentimes fall asleep in my chair, listening to my classes. It was pretty funny. But, yeah, I wanted something more for my career, and I really loved teaching. I did a lot with the students and a lot of training and training a pharmacist when I worked at Medco and decided that teaching and something more clinical was definitely the way I wanted to go.

[00:06:53] TU: Those relationships at Ohio State, obviously, would continue to bear fruit to this day. I know you’re so well-admired among the faculty at Ohio State. Obviously, there’s been collaborations there that have happened since then. So tell us about that journey post residency and, ultimately, the doors that would open relate it to that passion around teaching and the work that you’ve been doing since then.

[00:07:15] SA: All right. So when I graduated from my PharmD, it was June of 2010, and I was struggling with what to do at that point, right? Do I stay with Medco? I’d actually talked to Maria Pruchnicki, who is faculty at Ohio State, and I said, “I still kind of want to teach. What should we do?” So she actually came up with this plan for me as, a pharmacist, as a practicing pharmacist, to be a teaching assistant at Ohio State. She’s like, “This is something I’ve wanted to try.” Like bring an actual pharmacist while they’re practicing. So that was the plan. 

So in fall of 2010, I was supposed to be a TA for her class, just to see how this would go, and that was in Columbus, Ohio. So around about that time, I had a tragedy happen in my life and determined that I was not going to stay in Columbus after this happened. So I left Columbus, and I remember I just graduated with my doctorate. My hometown is Athens. I grew up here. So I said to Ohio State and I said to – I adore Ohio State. They’ve taken really, really, really good care of me. The people, they’re amazing human beings. So I said to them, I said, “Hey, I have to go home. Like I cannot stay in Columbus. And if there is anything you would like me to do there, I am happy to do that.” 

I went to Ohio University because I knew people that worked at OU, and I said, “Hey, if there’s something you’d like me to do, I will do that. Otherwise, I’m going to dread my hair and become a barista and get some neck tattoos.” That was the other choice. So I don’t know if they didn’t want to see me with neck tattoos. I mean, I don’t know if that was what they were thinking about.

[00:08:59] TU: There’s still time, Sarah. There’s still time for your tattoos. 

[00:09:01] SA: I know. Believe me, Jim. You know it’s going to happen someday. You’re going to be like, “What happened to you?” And I’m like, “Yeah, time for the neck tattoos.” 

[00:09:08] TU: That’s right. 

[00:09:11] SA: Anyway, so actually, Ohio State and Ohio University College of Osteopathic Medicine had actually been discussing having a pharmacist there already. But they couldn’t find someone to work there with the money that they were going to pay because at the time, pharmacists were making quite a bit of money. To be honest with you, I didn’t care. I should be more concerned about money than I am. I don’t care about it that much. It’s not a good thing I don’t think. Over the years, I’m like, “Sarah, you really should care more about it.” But I was like, “I didn’t care.” Especially at that time, like I had been through a lot and I just – All I wanted to do is keep life simple and maybe just teach a little bit and not lose my PharmD or not lose like the clinical education I received. 

They worked it out, so I would have a part-time residency, and I would take students who were under rotation and expand practices in Southeast Ohio. If it worked, then we could talk about making it a full-time position. So it worked out great for both of us. Because if it didn’t work, they didn’t – It wasn’t something that they were all tied into. If it didn’t work for me, it wasn’t something I was tied into. So I ended up with a one-year residency program, a PGY1 in ambulatory care here in Southeast Ohio, where I worked at a free clinic that OU had, OUHCOM has, and was able to bring students down and started teaching classes at OUHCOM. So it actually worked out really well for everyone. I think it was sort of just meant to be, if I can say that.

[00:10:40] TU: For our listeners that are not in the great state of Ohio, just some more context, we have seven colleges of pharmacy here in the state of Ohio. There really is and has been a gap around a pharmacist presence, as well as opportunities for healthcare needs in Southeast Ohio. So OU College of Medicine, Osteopathic College of Medicine, doesn’t have a pharmacy, a PharmD program. So there’s just a really good natural alignment there in terms of Ohio State being able to expand its mission and its work. There wasn’t a competing college in the area. There’s a need for health care and a pharmacist services and presence in that area. 

I think it was a really cool alignment of some mentors that you had through your journey at Ohio State, obviously, your passion for the work that you’re doing, and also just asking the question, right? So, hey, I’m going back home. I’m going to Southeast Ohio. Like if there’s an opportunity that we can collaborate on something, great. If not, that’s okay. But asking that question and seeing those doors open. Obviously, the impact that has been since then is a really cool story. All of the students, probably hundreds, right, if not thousands of students who precepted at this point medical pharmacy, that have been to be able to be impacted by this. 

So 2011, you make the move back to Athens, and you have this idea. You have this vision to start a nonprofit pharmacy. We’re going to talk about that journey and really 10 years from idea to doors opening. But tell us more about the vision and why that came to be that you really saw this opportunity to open a nonprofit pharmacy in Southeast Ohio.

[00:12:15] SA: When I came down and was able to work at this free clinic that OU had started, I thought it was fantastic. So they had actually been operating this free clinic out of OU, out of the College of Medicine here at OU since like the late ‘80s. It actually had been going on for a long time, and I actually had not known about it. So when I came back and had this opportunity to work here, they had a mobile unit, so they could actually go out into the community. They had a really amazing program, and I hadn’t been here a week, seriously, like a week. I was like, “Okay. So you have this great program, but you don’t have access to medications.” 

These patients would be eligible to come in and see the provider at no charge. Oftentimes, they would be able to get their lab work done either at reduced or no cost, depending on like the income that they brought in. They could even get hospitalizations or something done at the hospital if they needed to at low to no cost. But they had no access to meds. At the time, the clinic was actually contracting with a local pharmacy, which was good for the local pharmacy too. 

But it was really the cost that the free clinic was paying for medications was pretty giant, and they still didn’t have access to a lot of brand name medications, a lot of newer meds. Most of the meds they were giving were on like the four-dollar list at the local pharmacies. Or they would sometimes purchase like vitamins and over-the-counter products they actually give to the patients. So it was just a huge gap, and I knew that when I had come here. 

Shortly before I moved back to Athens, I had a tour of the Charitable Pharmacy in Columbus, which I didn’t realize at the time they had just opened. So that was just a few years before I moved to Athens, a couple years, actually, a year before I moved to Athens. Anyway, I had that tour at the Charitable Pharmacy. Then when I came to Athens, I was like, “Oh, my goodness. We need a Charitable Pharmacy.” That’s the bottom line. We need a pharmacy here to offer meds at no cost to the patients of the area because we had people who were working and weren’t offered insurance. Or their insurance costs were so high that they could not pay for medications on top of the insurance costs. 

I also find it pretty frustrating that the patients who don’t have money don’t have access to the most clinically relevant medications at the time. I watch commercials, and I see commercials for Jardiance and all these great medications. I think, well, that’s really great for the people who can afford it. So I have a real problem with that of people not having access to the meds that are clinically the most relevant and the most helpful for them. I saw that gap in care and I thought, “Oh, the Charitable Pharmacy, we need one of those here.” 

So it truly started probably in 2011. About the summer of 2011 is when I started looking for how do I do this. Like what are our next steps to getting a free pharmacy in Southeast Ohio? So that’s where it started.

[00:15:18] TU: So one of the things I always like to ask folks that have started something, that could be a business, for-profit, nonprofit, is it’s one thing to have a bold vision. It’s a huge step. It’s another thing to actually take action and take that first step without getting paralyzed by all of the things that can happen between idea. I want to open a nonprofit pharmacy to actually being able to dispense that first medication, right? Probably arguably more complex and most ideas folks have when you think about the landscape of nonprofits, when you add on top of that, some of the regulatory aspects of obviously dispensing medications and pharmacy and funding and all these things. 

That first step I want to focus on because that’s the piece where often I think folks get hung up on is I’ve got this vision. I’m passionate. I’m excited about it. I can see potentially that first person walking in the door. We’re making a difference in the community. Oh, my gosh. There’s a lot that needs to happen between now and then. So tell us about that first few months or years, as you think about the things that needed to happen and how you were able to get momentum and take those first few steps forward.

[00:16:23] SA: You and I had talked about this prior. But when I started, when I saw that, that we needed that in 2011, I reached out to a lot of people that I knew or thought may be able to assist or when to expand or connect with Southeast Ohio. So I reached out to a lot of people over that period of time. From around 2011 to around 2019, I connected with a lot of people, trying to not recreate the wheel but expand other services to Southeast Ohio region. 

I wasn’t necessarily told no directly. But I was not – It wasn’t something that they saw in their vision as what I was told from several people. Either that or I would just be ignored, which I’m going to say that I think I knew that it was such a need down here. I guess I expected more, and so I got really frustrated. I’m going to tell you, I think the first step was me saying, “You know what? I’m finished with this. I’m going to do it myself. If no one’s going to help me –” Kind of like a child, I guess, you would say. Like, “If you’re not going to help me, I’ll just do it myself.” 

Which I think that a lot of people, even in Southeast Ohio, who I had been working with at the time, I had worked a lot with the Athens Foundation. I want to say that they have been incredibly supportive of me and my journey. Anyway, they were kind of the first step for me, and I had worked with a woman named Susan Urano from the Athens Foundation, who I think she thought I was a little bit crazy, but yet wanted to watch what it looked like. So she had been incredibly supportive of me getting started. 

The moment I said, “You know what? I’m finished. I’m going to do this myself,” I had several providers in the area who were also motivated to make this change. One of my closest allies in this has been a physician named Marc Richards, has been incredibly supportive on this. He saw the vision with me, so he was really helpful. So I think it was finding that small group of people who would also carry that torch with me, and we formed a board. 

So the first thing we did was form a board in fall of 2019. That is sort of where we started. It consisted of physicians. It consisted of a professor I had worked with at the College of Chemistry, who was – He worked in the pre-pharmacy program here. So Ohio University actually has a pre-pharmacy degree that they can get who we’ve partnered with Ohio State over the last several years. We’ve had a lot of people graduate from both OU and then go to the College of Pharmacy at OSU.

But he sat on the board. I had a nurse practitioner on the board from the free clinic and some local people on the board. So we just started. We just literally all got together, sat down, and we just started. We had a lawyer, a wonderful lawyer. He’s been fantastic, Ryan Law Offices, and he’s been phenomenal. So anyway, I think it was just starting with kind of a handful of people.

[00:19:18] TU: I think that the two things to take away from there are a vision that obviously, number one, resonates. But you’re also – I think that naive optimism is a good thing when you’re getting – I literally do. I tell it – My wife and I talk about this all the time. Like if there is not some level of like naive, bordering, reckless optimism, like we’re probably not going to persist through, right? 

I mean, again, 2011, you have the idea. 2019, you formed the board. It’s an eight-year stretch of time, right? It’s incredible to be able to then get to 2021. We’ll talk about that, 2022, where you’re actually able to obviously operate and have an impact in the community. So the board in 2019, and so I sense a compelling vision there. Then obviously, the second piece I was going to mention is that you’ve got people that join you in that vision. So I think that’s an incredible aspect of a leader is, number one, can we cast a vision? Number two, can we get other people involved and excited and on fire about that vision as well?

For those that are thinking about that, “Hey, I’d love to start a foundation or nonprofit,” anyone who Googles start a 501(c)(3), it’s – You’re about to webpages, and you’re like, “Maybe this isn’t for me, right?” That board, I suspect, was an essential step in the nonprofit status. Is that correct? 

[00:20:36] SA: Right, absolutely. So we had to have that to get our status. Yes. To file the papers.

[00:20:41] TU: So you’re navigating. It sounds like with an attorney’s effort, you were able to navigate through that 501(c)(3) status for the pharmacy yourself. 

[00:20:48] SA: Yes. Yup. So we had help with the law office. Yeah. Everyone signed the board. Everyone signed the paperwork. We had – One of the people on the board actually donated. I think it was $250 to submit that 501(c)(3).

[00:21:02] TU: Okay. So take us from that moment. 2019, you have the board, and then you eventually would have a full launch in 2022. But obviously, you mentioned to me before we recorded that you had a soft launch to your prior. Of course, there’s the pandemic through all of this as well. So tell me about actually getting to that point of we’re opening for business and then, ultimately, what the service looks like in terms of hours of operation and what we’re offering. Then we can talk about the future going forward.

[00:21:31] SA: Okay. That sounds good. So 2019, we got the board formed. Once we had the board, we also realized – So with the State Board of Pharmacy, Tim, you had mentioned earlier, there’s a lot of regulatory issues. Even just starting a pharmacy, there’s quite a few checkboxes that you have to fill in before you can move forward, which is fine. It’s just part of pharmacy and part of the world we live in. It’s fine. 

So the way we’d had the outlook with the board and myself, we looked at it like we’re going to take one step. The only thing that kept going through my head this entire time is the journey of 1,000 miles begins with a single step. The journey of 1,000 miles begins with that single step. I had to say that over and over and over again to myself. Every time we take two steps forward, we would have one step back and two steps forward and one step back. 

I will say that I also feel that there are funders in and around the state of Ohio who also saw the need for this. So once we got the 501(c)(3) status, we had to have that first, right? The second thing we had to have was an address. We couldn’t do anything without having an address, right? I said, “Okay. Well, then we need funding for rentable space. We have to be able to get a space. And what does that look like? And how much money do we have? And how do we get a rental space if we don’t have any money?” 

When we talked earlier, I was thinking about people asking if they should do a nonprofit, and I would say don’t do it. I’m just kidding. I really am kidding. It’s truly taken a piece of my soul to work on this, and I keep waiting for that moment when it’s going to fly, right? When it’s going to like leave the nest and take off. 

[00:23:04] TU: It’s coming. It’s coming. 

[00:23:05] SA: I’m hoping, fingers crossed, fingers crossed. So anyway, I actually think the interesting thing with COVID is I actually think that we got a lot of grants because of COVID. I think it was actually a benefit to us, which you can say that, right? COVID was a benefit. But I actually believe we got quite a few grant opportunities because of COVID, and we actually received funding from the state of Ohio, from the Charitable Healthcare Network in the state of Ohio who does indigent funding. They gave us a nice amount of money that we could at least start to rent a space. 

So we actually – Within the first year with a lot of effort from myself and a couple of the board members, we ended up getting around $110,000 in grant funding for startup costs. It was a lot of time and effort put into writing those grants and knowing who to contact and where to go. I mean, it literally took a year just for us to get the grant and the startup funding. 

Then another year, as we purchased our equipment and software and computers and phone lines and Internet, and we had to have the state board come in and inspect, and then we had to – Once we got our pharmacist license approved, then we had to order medications and contact those people and make sure we had our terminal distributors set up and make sure they had their terminal distributors set up, right? Yeah. It was a long, long process. 

We actually started dispensing in June of 2021 as a soft opening. I had been working with one of the – OhioHealth has also been an incredible partner for us. But I was working with the Ohio Health Clinic, and we sort of did a soft opening with them, just to make sure that we were able to fill prescriptions. We’re making sure our software worked, and people could get to us, and that our printer worked, and our labels worked, and all of our clinical information worked, and we were able to get drugs. It was kind of a long process. 

Then we did have a final – We were able to hire a pharmacist with a grant that we received. We hired her part-time, and I’m going to say bless her heart because she literally is working for us for not a whole lot of money for as much as pharmacists get paid, and she is one dedicated, amazing human being. Kendra Donnelly is working for us, and she actually is also from Southeast Ohio. She’s an amazing human, and she literally took a step out to come and work for us. So I appreciate her a lot. She started in November. With her help, we were able to do a grand opening April of 2022. 

So our hours right now are kind of wishy-washy. Actually, I’m still working another full-time job. I’m still teaching. I still do ambulatory care practice with OhioHealth. So I tried to come in a day and a half a week. Kendra fills in the blanks with the other ones, but we share her with Kroger Pharmacy. To date, though, we have dispensed over 400 prescriptions, and we have dispensed over $130,000 in drug costs. So we have done it. We are here. We are here. I said it’s miraculous and yet terrifying. I said I’m terrified, terrified, and yet incredibly excited. 

[00:26:02] TU: One, it’s incredible to hear the implementation, right? We talked about the journey from idea to doors opening, and now we’re obviously starting to talk about the fruit of the medications that have been dispensed, the value of that. To me, as I hear this, and maybe you don’t feel this in the moment, but as I hear it from an outsider, it feels like the iceberg under the water work has been largely done. Now, there’s really an opportunity to scale and to have the impact that your vision has had because of all the work that’s been done over the last 10 years. 

Grants are great, but they take a lot of time and effort, which is why we need Joe Burrow to step up and write –

[00:26:41] SA: Yes. Come on, Joe. 

[00:26:43] TU: Come on, Joe. We need that check. Let’s do this. 

[00:26:45] SA: One cool mill. A cool mill, Joey. Come on buddy. 

[00:26:47] TU: That’s all we’re asking for. Yeah. It’s that gold necklace, right? That’s all we need. 

[00:26:51] SA: That’s right. That’s right. 

[00:26:53] TU: When we talked a few weeks ago, I really sense that giving. Obviously, our listeners are going to get that feel just from this interview. I sense that giving both time and money is a really key part of your financial planning goals. I recall you saying something along the lines of, “I don’t want to just die with a million dollars sitting in the bank.” You mentioned a little while ago that maybe I should have been better about money. But you’ve done your diligence. 

We often talk on this podcast, that there’s a balance between, sure, we need to think about the future. We’ve got to save for that future life and retirement. But we also need to make sure we’re living a rich life along the way. One aspect of that is making sure that we’re intentional when it comes to the giving part of the plan. So tell us more about why you have prioritized giving as a part of the financial plan and how you’ve been able to execute on this when there are lots of competing priorities for both your time and your money.

[00:27:46] SA: That is a great question. I actually – When I even opened and we had started talking, I didn’t give a whole lot of information about my family. But I’m going to say that my parents – I was raised in the church. I think regardless of the spiritual realm in which you’re raised, a lot of my upbringing was about giving and making sure that those who were not as fortunate – That I gave to those people who were not as fortunate. I was taught that, I mean, since a young age. 

I think that, for me, that is – I don’t have a lot of money in my – I never have needed that or wanted that. But I have time. Do I have time? That’s the question. 

[00:28:30] TU: That is the question. 

[00:28:31] SA: I think I don’t have time. But I definitely give wholeheartedly of my time is what I give. So I have given. It makes me feel good, truly. And when I’m at the free pharmacy, it is a lot like community, pharmacy, right? It’s a lot. You’re on your feet. You’re taking phone calls. You’re answering questions. You’re trying to figure out cost of medications, spending a lot of time on the phone, asking patients about their insurance coverage or why are you not eligible and how much is your copay for this? 

I have a couple people – Just because it’s come to my head, I have a woman who has an $8,000 deductible on her plan, $8,000. That always comes to my head about people with their deductibles. So why giving? Because I can. Because I can. I’m bright. I have a good job. I have a lot of support from my family and my community. I can and I’m able, so why not? It makes me feel good. I feel like I’ve done something to make myself proud and to make my community proud and my family proud.

[00:29:36] TU: I love that. Because I can, you talked about the time and, obviously, it makes me feel good. There’s a book I read a couple years ago called Happy Money by Elizabeth Dunn, the science of happier spending. It’s a really cool read into – We always talk about the connection between happiness and money and ultimately what really matters. What they conclude through their research is it really comes down to giving and experiences. Those are really the two main things. 

I think when we’re talking about this journey, it’s really both of those together, right? It’s the experience of what you’ve built and the impact that it’s going to have and the legacy of that. But also, obviously, the fulfilling aspect of being able to give your time and money as well. You joked about do I really have time, and I think that’s a real thing. I would really encourage our listeners, like Sarah has been at this for a long time. So for this to really grow and scale and have the impact, we need people to step up and be able to give some financial health to see the pharmacy continue to thrive. 

I would love for individuals to check out the website, risingsunspharmacy.org. We’ll link to that in the show notes. Again, risingsunspharmacy.org. You can see some information on there to get involved, to give, and we would love to get the community involved in that.

Sarah, this has been awesome. I’m looking forward to coming down next week and checking out the pharmacy myself. So thank you so much for taking the time to come on the show and to talk about this journey. I really appreciate it.

[00:31:07] SA: Thank you, Tim, for letting me share. It’s been quite the journey, so it’s good to share it. I appreciate you.

[00:31:12] TU: Thank you, Sara. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:31:13] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 275: How to Build a Retirement Paycheck (Retirement Planning)


How to Build a Retirement Paycheck (Retirement Planning)

In the fourth episode of the four-part series on retirement planning, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, discuss how to build a retirement paycheck.

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, Your Financial Pharmacist Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, wrap up our four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to build a retirement paycheck. Highlights from the show include a discussion on retirement income planning and how social security claiming strategies fit into retirement income planning. Three critical issues addressed include how to replace your paycheck with your retirement income that meets your retirement expense needs, how to plan for large one-time expenditures in retirement, and how to mitigate the risks one faces in retirement. Tim Baker shares three approaches to building a retirement paycheck, The Flooring Strategy, The Bucket Strategy, and The Systematic Withdrawal Strategy. Tim dives into the theory behind each and how to put them to use in your retirement planning. When it comes to retirement, the value of a financial planner throughout the timeline of your life is tremendous, not just in the accumulation phase of your retirement planning. It is valuable to take stock of where you are now regarding the social security statement, cash flow, budget, and net worth, in addition to plans for retirement. Tim Baker explains how life planning plays an integral role in retirement planning, often ahead of financial planning to build the retirement lifestyle you envision with a paycheck to match. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I wrap up our four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to build a retirement paycheck. Highlights from the show include discussing what retirement income planning is, three key issues when determining a retirement income plan, how Social Security fits into retirement income planning, and three different approaches to use or consider using when building a retirement paycheck.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:17] TU: Hey, everyone. Welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast. We are on our fourth and final part of our series on retirement planning. On episode 272, we talked about determining how much is enough, building that nest egg. Episode 273, we discussed the alphabet soup of retirement accounts. What are the different options or at least the tax favored accounts that we’ll focus on potentially? Then last week on episode 274, we talked about risk tolerance versus risk capacity and determining or beginning to determine our asset allocation plan. 

So this week, we’re going to talk about how to build a retirement paycheck. Ultimately, we’re at the point where we’ve accrued that nest egg we established at the very beginning, and the question is now what, right? How are we going to distribute those funds and ultimately replace what was our W2 income and be able to replace that with the various investments and buckets of savings that we’ve accrued over the years? 

So Tim, this feels like an overlooked topic and one that is not often discussed. You recently shared with me that, really, up until more recently, it has not even been foundational in the Certified Financial Planner training. So why is that the case with what appears to be such an important topic?

[00:02:28] TB: I think it’s kind of rooted in for a long time, the predominant advisor that was out there was – I’m not going to say an advisor was a broker. So when you work with a financial advisor back in the day, it was kind of more to transact investment trades. So it was you calling your broker and saying like, “Hey, I like this stock,” or, “I like this mutual fund,” or whatever. Like, “What do you think?” Then that would be the exchange. Really, it was more about placing the orders than kind of looking at something more comprehensively. 

The problem, though, is that even like in the CFP’s like curriculum, I feel like most of it is really geared around the accumulation stage of like gathering assets, and this is how to understand modern portfolio theory in investment, all that kind of stuff. But it’s kind of like when you get to the end, it’s like, “Okay, now what?” Like, “What do you –” We have these buckets of money that are separated between a Roth IRA a 401(k). You might have money in a pension. 

What we’re really trying to figure out is like, okay, how do we convert these pools of money into a steady, sustainable retirement paycheck that’s going to last the rest of your life? It’s really hard to do. It’s really hard to do. Again, like, I’ve worked with firms where the conversation is, “Hey, Tim. You’re the client. We’re going into 2023. What do you need next year?” I think that like if you’re in that relationship of like you’re kind of just advising on stocks or investments, maybe that holds up. 

But I think like what we’re seeing, like if I’m the client, the first question I would ask to that question was like, “Well, what can I take?” Like, “What can I take, so I don’t run out of money,” advice. Or like –

[00:04:19] TU: Shift of conversations. Yup.

[00:04:20] TB: Yeah. Tell me that like. It’s nice that – That’s kind of like what we talked about in previous episode is like investments are really important. But I think if you’re working with someone comprehensively, it shifts more to like, okay, what are the investments and less about the tactical and more about the strategic approach of like, “Okay, now that we’ve accumulated all these assets, like how can we do this with the mountain risks that we face?” 

Because one of the really hard parts about this, Tim, is like you could live to your 72 or you can live to your 102. We have no idea. 

[00:04:54] TU: That’s right. Yeah. 

[00:04:55] TB: Without that major variable of like the duration of the plan, which is connected to your life, super hard, right? So I think the industry is changing, where it’s trying to equip advisors with more tools and more education around this shift from the accumulation phase to withdrawal phase and really have meaningful conversations with clients because this is only going to get more important, right? The data says that roughly 10,000, baby boomers turn age 65 every day, and half of them have never really calculated where they’re at with what they need to maintain their lifestyle. 

So it is kind of a little bit of like flying by the seat of your pants. Like I said, it’s just a complex thing. If you’re looking at how do we convert assets to income streams while keeping the tax man in mind, and those income streams could be Social Security. It could be working part-time in retirement. How does that affect your Social Security paycheck? It could be distributed money from a 401(k) or a taxable account or a Roth IRA. There’s very strict ways you should do that to maximize your taxes or minimize your taxes, I should say. 

It could be a pension or like you convert part of that bucket of money into an annuity, along with – We’ll talk about that more with the flooring strategy. How does your home play a part in this? A lot of people kind of discount the home, even when that’s going to be the biggest expense of any retiree is your home. That’s typically at any phase of retirement, except for maybe like old old, where it might be more of a health – Those people that are kind of 90s plus is more medical expensive. 

So it is a complex thing to basically tackle, and you wouldn’t think it would be that hard because a lot of people are like, “Oh, $1,000,000. Four percent, $40,000. We’re good.” Kind of wipe your hands of it, and you’re good to go. But it’s a lot more complicated than that.

[00:06:59] TU: Yeah. I think it’s a good reminder, and I’m glad we’re digging into this topic, really, for the first time in detail. I think we’ve certainly spent a lot of time on the show talking about the accumulation phase. But to your point, we very much tend to oversimplify this, right? You need 3.2 in a nest egg. Or you need – Based on the four percent rule, you can draw so much per year. 

Well, what about all the various asset pools that are out there, right? What about your home, whether you’re going to work at all during retirement? How does that impact how and when you withdraw? What about all the tax strategies? What about taxable accounts versus tax-deferred accounts? I mean, just so many different layers to consider here. Then, obviously, Social Security is another one to put on top of that as well. 

So important that we’re thinking not only about the accumulation but also what’s the strategy and the optimization. I think this is another great example where like, in my opinion, obviously, bias, like the value of a financial planner is a lifelong journey. So early on, we’re working on accumulation, getting started, really understanding our options and our vehicles, doing it at a tax-efficient way. 

Here, we’re talking about a whole another host of things that when you look at advisor fees and other things that are involved, like if done well, the return on investment there is very strong, not only numerically in terms of tax saving optimization, but also in terms of having that third party, having somebody affirming and making sure that you’re feeling comfortable and confident in the distribution of all the hard work you’ve done to accumulate along the way.

[00:08:30] TB: Yeah. I think the big thing that I would say along those lines is that I think the difference between advisors today and then advisors of your, like it’s more of a collaborative process. Before, it might be like, “Hey, what do you need?” Or this is like what you get type of thing. Whereas more it’s coming from like a place of like what’s going on and like what are the things that are going on in your life and then basically constructing that from that approach. 

I think it is more of a collaborative approach versus like us saying this is what it is or waving our finger or whatever. So like I think that’s a big distinction to make too. 

[00:09:12] TU: Tim, what are some of the key issues? So here we’re talking about retirement income planning. Ultimately, we’re discussing how to build this retirement paycheck. What are some of the key issues that folks need to be thinking about when it comes to building this retirement income and planning for this?

[00:09:29] TB: Yeah. So the three big things that are out there are how do you replace a paycheck with kind of a stable source of income to meet your basic retirement expenses, which, again, can be a tough thing to figure out because you snap your fingers, Tim, and like you’re not going to work. So like how are you spending your day? 

For some people, it might be you’re just sitting in a room because your spouse is still working. For other people, it’s like your guys are both retired. So it’s like, “Hey, school’s out.” You’re kind of throwing your books in the air. You’re traveling. You’re dining out. You’re doing all those things that you didn’t do. So like maybe your expenses go up. 

So I think sitting down and looking at like what does retirement look like for you and trying to sketch out. We talked about budgets with clients, younger clients, and like they don’t go away like because like a big part of this equation is like how much you’re going to spend. So how do we give you a paycheck that’s going to meet your basic retirement expenses, number one? 

The second thing is how do you plan for those one time, large, large expenditures that are planned? So that might be like a car purchase, like big vacations. It could be –

[00:10:42] TU: Second properties, right?

[00:10:43] TB: Second property. It could be paying for a son or a daughter’s wedding. Like those types of things are big. Then the last part is like how do we start to not inoculate but mitigate the risks that you face in retirement. The risks are many. There’s lots of potential potholes that are out there that can trip you up. One is like life expectancy. We don’t know how long you’re going to live. So a lot of people, they base their Social Security decision making on, “Well, my uncle died at this age, and my dad died at this age, and I’m just going to take it,” which is typically not – 

Sometimes, it’s advisable. But sometimes, it’s not because the other thing that we have to remember is that in Social Security, your spouse gets the larger of the benefit that you’re collecting. So if I claim early because my life expectancy in my mind is lower, my benefit is going to be reduced. But it still might be better for me to wait and defer, so that benefit grows. So then like maybe I collected for four or five years, but then Shea would get that when I kick the bucket. 

So those are things that people just don’t think about. So life expectancy, big risk. Inflation. So sources of retirement income need to increase at the same rate as the cost of goods and services, which right now is tough, right? Because we were seeing a spike in inflation. So how do we combat that, the inflation, and how do we how do we make sure that the – So that’s another reason that Social Security is great because it gets cost of living adjustments every year, most years, that keeps pace with inflation. Most products out there do not. Even if you buy an annuity on the street, Social Security is going to beat that every single time. 

The other one is a death of a spouse. So income needs don’t necessarily go in half when your spouse dies. So how do we – Is that looking at things like insurance or second to die policies? The things like that to make sure that you are okay that you had two Social Security income streams, and now you only have one. It’s the greater one. But like how do we plan for that? 

Health care. So we know that’s increasing exponentially. How do we plan for that long-term care? So this is the possibility of needing care for those everyday activities like eating and bathing and using the bathroom, those types of things. I think the majority of people, they use family members. But do you buy a policy to help with that?

Investment returns. We talked about, Tim, the stock market is volatile. Fixed income portfolios, which are often retirement portfolios because we want more of that safety in principle, like those things changes over time. So right now, it’s probably good to look at things that have something with inflation tied into that. 

Then probably the last one, which I think is the most dangerous one, is the sequence of returns risk. So this is the risk of receiving a lower or negative returns early in your retirement when withdrawals are made. That’s what I talked about last episode. If your portfolio goes from a $1 million to $600,000, and then you’re taking 40,000 or 50,000 dollars a year out of that, it’s almost impossible to overcome both of those. 

So that’s where it goes back to like is your asset allocation right when you get into that eye of the storm before retirement. If it isn’t, maybe the hardest conversation that we have to have is like we have to wait for the market to recover because, ultimately, you might have to go back to work anyway if you go out and then you have to go back because we just don’t have enough money to sustain you for the rest of your life. 

So those are probably not all of the risks that are out there, Tim, but a good amount of the risk that you’re facing as you’re kind of saying, “Okay, how do I take this pot of money that I have and make it last for the next 30 years or so?”

[00:14:40] TU: Yeah. The example of that last one, Tim, the sequence of returns, I think about folks that have retired in the last, what, 12 to 24 months, right? If there wasn’t kind of a change of asset allocation in the eye of the storm, as you talk about. Some folks might be feeling that in the moment, right? I saw the portfolio drop significantly, and maybe that did or did not change. If they had more than enough saved, maybe that didn’t matter as much. But maybe that means going back to work for a little bit of time or elongating the timeline to retirement. 

Again, so important that we’re really planning this from beginning, all the way through the actual withdrawal phases.

[00:15:15] TB: Yeah. One thing to note is that sometimes this is out of your control, like when you’re going to retire. Sometimes, it’s like –

[00:15:22] TU: That’s right. 

[00:15:23] TB: When there is a downturn in the market, it’s also because the economy is bad. So companies could be looking to either get you out the door or force retirement, and that can be really, really bad for your – I talk to my dad a lot. Like his company was bought by another company, and he was kind of winding down. But he was not ready to retire yet. But he was kind of duplicitous. They’re like, “Hey, you’re kind of on the chopping block here.” 

So that is the other thing is like sometimes we assume. Just like what I was talking about, some people assume they’re going to die early, so they take – Most of the time, they like outlive what they think. But the other part of that is we assume that like when I asked you the question, “Hey, Tim, like when do you want to retire,” and you say, “Hey, I will retire at full retirement age.” For us, it’s 67. That that’s actually going to be an option. 

[00:16:12] TU: In our decision, right? Yup. 

[00:16:14] TB: Yeah. Sometimes, it’s either because of job, or it’s because of the health of yourself or a family member that causes you to retire earlier than you expected. Something like 40% of people kind of fall into that bucket.

[00:16:29] TU: That’s a good point and a good reminder. Before we get too deep into talking a little bit more about Social Security and then specifically three different approaches and strategies to build your retirement paycheck, I want to reference folks to a resource that they can use to download, follow along with some of the discussion, as well as provide some other information. That resource is What Should I Consider Before I Retire. It talks about some of the considerations around cash flow, assets and debt, health care and insurance, tax planning, long-term planning, and other topics as well. You can download that at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retire. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retire. 

Tim, we can’t go too far into this topic without talking about Social Security. You’ve dabbled in it a little bit already. We talked about it in episode 242, which was Social Security 101, history, how it works, why it matters. One of the most common questions for good reasons is when. When should I begin to withdraw or begin to have access to Social Security? We all know. We’ve heard it before that the difference is significant between if we take it early at 62 or we wait until the age of 70. 

So give us some more information here on why this is such an important topic, what the differences can be in those numbers, and obviously the role that Social Security can play and will play likely in building retirement paycheck.

[00:17:47] TB: Yeah. I would even back up before we even talk about that, Tim, because I think it’s going to play into this. I think it’s kind of like people want to talk about like, “Oh, what do you think about this like stock or this investment or whatever?” I’m like, “I don’t know. Where are you at? Where are you going?” 

So I think the first thing, even before we talk about Social Security, is to take stock of those two things. Where are we at, and where are we going? So like, to me, I think the two biggest things to look at, and Social Security is part of this, is look at your Social Security statement. I’ve done this recently. You can go on to socialsecurity.gov and put in your Social Security number and create an account. It’ll basically pull up your benefits estimate. So like it’ll say – Like for me, if I retire early, like this is the benefit that I get, 2,200 bucks. If I retire at full retirement age, for me, it’s 67, my benefit’s 3,300 bucks. Then if I wait till 70, which you get deferral credits, 4,220. 

[00:18:54] TU: Wow, big difference. 

[00:18:55] TB: Yeah. Socialsecurity.gov is actually pretty – They have some good calculators and like – So it’s pretty decent. So I would say like take stock of where you’re at, which means looking at the Social Security statement, looking at your cash flow statement, i.e. budget, like what’s that look like? Then the big one is the net worth statement. So what are the assets? What are the liabilities? 

From there, I think we have a conversation of like where are we going. I think that’s like when do you want to retire. Some people might be like, “I want to work forever.” Some people are – They’re like, “Now. I want to retire now. I’m 45. I want to retire now.” So I think going through some of those exercises, like I’m a huge proponent of life planning. It’s like changed my life. But actually sitting down – I think so much of the emphasis on retirement is kind of this oasis of like, “I’ve made it. I have some type of financial independence. My calendar is back, and it’s like this destination.” But it’s really more of an ongoing journey of, okay, so you wake up. The retirement party’s over. You just got back from your Hawaii trip to celebrate your retirement. What are you doing? Are you by yourself? Is your spouse still working? Like how are you spending your day? 

So actually write down like what is an ideal schedule. What are the things that are still on your – Things that if you were to die today or tomorrow that you have left undone. What are the things that you’re passionate about? So sometimes, unfortunately, our passions might not necessarily align with like our ability to earn and make money. So sometimes, those things are left for retirement to say, “Hey, I always want to volunteer to do this,” or, “I always wanted to help kids here,” or whatever. 

So I think really having a plan for that. Because to be honest, like the finances are almost – They’re not almost. They are. The finances are secondary. The financial plan in retirement is secondary to like the life plan in retirement because so much of our identity is tied up in our job as director of pharmacy here or pharmacy manager or whatever it is. That it’s hard for us to like wake up one day and be like, “Okay, I’m not that person anymore.” Well, you are that person. You’re just not working in that job anymore. 

But it’s even hard for spouses too because so much of your time is at work, right? So kind of to relearn and do – That’s a real thing. A lot of retirees struggle with addiction, with depression, with kind of like a loss of sense of self and things like that, that I think needs to be addressed. More and more people are talking about this, which is good. So I think like once you get an idea of like, “Hey, where are we at numbers wise and like where are we going life planning-wise,” then I think it’s really important to start getting to things like Social Security and claiming strategies and things like that. 

So to answer your question, Tim, I think that it is one of the most important, if not the most important, decision that you make in building out your retirement plan. Actually, Morningstar did a study that said that – So I think it was based on working with an advisor. It helps you with better decision making can increase your retirement income by 37%. Nine percent of that, which is the highest one, was the Social Security claiming strategy. Of the 37%, 9% of that was that alone. 

You could see, when I rattled off my numbers, 2,200, 3,300, 4,200, that’s a huge difference. For so many people, for a long time, they’ve looked at it as like a breakeven. So they say like, “Okay. If I take 2,200 versus the 3,300, then I have to live to this age to breakeven on what I would be given up.” The problem with that is that the biggest risk that Social Security combats is longevity, meaning that your money doesn’t run out. So if a good chunk of your income is coming from Social Security, which gets cost of living adjustments and never runs out because it’s backed by the full faith and credit of the US government, like that’s huge. 

It really doesn’t matter if you leave some money on the table. But even in most cases, that calculation is typically early 80s for a lot of people. So unless you are thinking that you’re going to live less than that, and you don’t have a spouse because we talked about the spouse gets the higher benefit, then maybe you look at that. But it really needs to be looked at from I think more of an insurance. Like a safety perspective is when you’re looking at that. 

As we said, 78% is basically the amount of your Social Security benefit increases each year from age 62 to 70. So what that means is that every year you defer, you get a 7% increase, a raise in your retirement paycheck. So if you think about that as a working person, if I can lock in seven or eight percent as a raise for eight years, like that’s huge. But for whatever reason, we look at this as like, “If I don’t take this as soon as possible, I’m going to lose out. I’m not going to get the money back.” I think it’s a framing of the decision that we have to relook at. 

So I think the big thing here is like it’s kind of getting away from the water cooler. I think a lot of people claim benefits as soon as possible. I think it’s sometimes greatly influenced by family members, coworkers. It’s the same thing we say with like student loans, where people are like, “Oh, my classmates are doing this.” I’m like, “You’re not your classmates. You have your own financial plan. You do you type of thing.” 

Sources of income in your retirement paycheck do not have an inflation protection as Social Security does. So that’s also hugely important, especially in the times that we’re living in right now. So I think the steps to optimize your claiming strategies, one is to educate yourself. Determine what your benefit is and the implications of claiming at different ages, which means pulling your statement. 

I think that before you even get there, Tim, this is kind of in the get organized of like where are we at. One of the things that you’ll see on your statement is like all of your years. So it looks at 30 years, 35 years, I should know this, of earnings. You can actually say like, “Okay, this is right or this is wrong.” So if you have a beef with what they’re reporting, then you can basically say, “Hey, let me pull my 2008 return.” I can say I actually didn’t make 100,000. I made 150,000, and that will change your benefit. So that’s also a big thing. 

Then take the steps to figure out what is the best solution for you in terms of claiming, and that’s going to be so huge with kind of a jumping off point of how you’re going to build your retirement paycheck.

[00:25:34] TU: Tim, can you read your numbers again? I think those were really powerful. So you gave the early full retirement. I’m looking at mine as well, but they’re skewed a little bit because I worked at universities for a while, where I wasn’t contributing to Social Security, so much lower. But you gave your early number, your full 60 to 67. Then you’re delayed. What were those numbers?

[00:25:52] TB: So my early at 62 is $2,211. If I were to wait until my full retirement age, which for me is 67. Anybody that’s born after 1960, I think, the benefit goes to $3,325.

[00:26:15] TU: So almost a little over 1,000 more. Okay. Then what about 70?

[00:26:18] TB: Then at age 70, the benefit goes to $4,220, and there’s no benefit to defer past that. That’s the range, so again – It’s getting better. People are most – You can see like people are delaying claiming now, which I think it means more people are educated about this. But I think for a majority of the people that are out there – Even if I don’t work, my plan is to not to claim Social Security until and unless barring some unforeseen things, is I’m going to be claiming that 70, and I’m going to collect – Again, this will change between now and then because my earnings will change. 

[00:26:58] TU: Numbers will change. Yup. 

[00:27:00] TB: But you can see the impact is huge. Again, the other thing to remind ourselves is that this is inflation-protected. So at the end of this year, retirees are going to get a major bump in their retirement paychecks because of how inflation has been this year. Whereas if you buy a commercial annuity on the street, so you say, “Hey, I’m going to take $200,000, and it’s going to be paying me a paycheck,” you might get some type of like 2% or 3%, which you’re going to pay a lot of money for. 

[00:27:30] TU: I get 9%, though, when inflation’s up. 

[00:27:32] TB: No, new. So that is off. That’s another thing. Again, it doesn’t really hit home for a lot of pre-retirees or even before that because like the world is your oyster, right? Like when you’re accumulating, you can always earn more money. But like for retirees, especially if they can’t work, which it’s a fixed income, so if you can make a greater percentage of your retirement check Social Security that is inflation-protected, it’s just going to greatly improve your longevity. To mitigate longevity risks in the money running out.

[00:28:12] TU: So in your example, there’s round numbers, about $2,000 difference between your early and your delayed, 62 and 70. So just some rough math. So $2,000 a year, I’m looking at eight years difference between 62 and 70. So basically, if you were to take it at 62, by the time you got to 70, there’d be a little over 16,000, 17,000 dollars that you wouldn’t have otherwise had if you delayed, right?

Now, if you wait and delay till 70 and it’s 2,000 extra per month, you can kind of see the math there of how many years it’ll take to essentially breakeven, right? Now, what we’re not including there is, obviously, the inflation component. Someone could argue, “Hey. Well, there’s an opportunity cost. If you pull money earlier, you could do other things with those.” But again, it goes to really show the difference and how if we’re planning early on, as we’re working on our nest egg kind of coming full circle where you started the series, if we’re planning for a delayed withdrawal from Social Security, well, then we’re going to be able to mitigate that feeling or need at 62 of, “Hey, I’ve got –” Or whatever the age would be for individuals that I got to have this money at this point in time. 

[00:29:21] TB: Wade Pfau, who is the professor of retirement income at the American College of Financial Services, one of the things he stated, because I’m going through a certification for retirement income certified professional, his quote is, “Deferring Social Security is the cheapest annuity money can buy.” So he’s done that study, where from 62 to 70, and then if you take that money and you were buying annuity, like it’s not even close. So you could do it like, hey, if you were to invest this for eight years, but it’s not even close like to basically do a one for one if you were to buy like an annuity on the street. 

That’s the big thing here because, again, if you put the money in the market, if you’re putting into an S&P 500, you’re risking that money, and it goes back to the sequence of returns. If you’re eight years and you needed that money, it’s going to be very, very conservative. You’re not going to be able to get the return. So you’re talking about a seven to eight percent raise for yourself year over year, and that is also inflation-protected, which is huge. 

Again, like one of the things that we should address is that if you’re a 30-year-old or even a 40-year-old, a 20-year-old, and you’re saying, “Social Security, I get it,” it’s going to be there. Social Security, I think, is one of those things, and I hate to say this, but it’s too big to – It’s not going to fail because so many people rely on that as their every day. So there’s a lot of things that says like the trust will be depleted. But you’ll still be able to sustain payouts at a reduced benefit. 

I think that’s what’s going to happen. I think people – I think the Congress is going to be forced to raise like payroll taxes to fund the trust. But I think that we’re also going to either see a step back in benefits in some way or 

[00:31:00] TU: Yeah, combination. Yeah. 

[00:31:02] TB: But at the end of the day, even a reduced version of Social Security is still going to be your best. I’m still going to encourage to – If your retirement paycheck is 1,000 bucks theoretically, I still wanted that to be – If we can get that to be $400, $500, $600, the most of that paycheck needs to come from Social Security because of its safety and the inflation protection.

[00:31:27] TU: Yeah. Again, when you’re working with someone who kind of is helping you build the next egg, you can run it with it. You can run it without it. You can run it in a middle ground, to your point. So maybe it’s not the full benefit or numbers we’re seeing there, but we think it’s a reduced amount and kind of see how you feel with what shakes out in terms of whether you’re on track or not and what you need to do.

[00:31:47] TB: Well, one last point to make about Social Security is really looking at this as an insurance decision versus like an investment decision. So typically, like wealthier people or people that don’t necessarily look at or need Social Security, they look at it more as like, “Okay, how do I get the most out of my money?” Most of the times, they’re going to defer. But for a lot of people that are really relying on this to make sure that their retirement paycheck is sustained for at least 30 years or their lifetime, it needs to be looked at as an insurance decision. 

If you look at the different risks like longevity risk, which is the risk of your money running out, the larger – This is a larger stream of lifetime inflation-protected risk. Like that’s important. Long-term care risk, so you have like more resources later than life. So if you’re getting a bigger paycheck, so if I’m getting 4,200 at 70, versus if I would have taken the 2,200 at 62, that means I have to deplete my portfolio more later. Inflation. We talked about the larger percentage that’s protected by inflation. 

The other big thing is reality risk. Like as you get older, if a majority of your paycheck is just coming straight from the government, it simplifies decision making. You’re also less at risk for like elder financial risk, which is you want to have a greater stream of income. It’s more about income streams versus assets. You have less opportunity for people to defraud you. Unfortunately, like financial advisors are top. They’re not top of the list. Actually, family members are at the top of the list for that. 

But the big thing is like excess withdrawals. So like if your greater paycheck is coming from Social Security, you don’t necessarily are going to deplete your assets faster. Eliminate some market risk because, again, you’re not relying on your assets as much. Then that whole risk of like early loss of spouse, deferring that larger benefit that then your survivor would get. 

So in the case of like, Shea, let’s say Shea has a benefit that’s $2,800, and I claim it 2,200 because I feel like I’m going to, I’m going to pass away early, that’s a big mistake because she is stuck with her $2,800 because my 2,200 is less, whereas if I were to defer and say, “At 70, I’m collecting 4,200.” Then even if I die at 78, she gets the 4,200, and then 2,800 goes away. Those are some of the things that we’re talking about in practice. It just makes sense to really look at this closely before kind of just doing whatever your coworker is doing.

[00:34:14] TU: Great stuff, Tim. We’re going to come back to this topic more. We’ve touched on it here. We talked about it previously in episode 242. But, man, there’s so many layers of Social Security to consider, and I think regardless of where someone is at in their career journey, an important topic and part of the financial planning that probably doesn’t get enough attention. Or it maybe just prematurely gets kind of ruled out, especially for folks that are early on in their journey. 

Let’s wrap up this series and this episode by talking about at a high level the three approaches to building your retirement paycheck. I love when you talk on this topic because I think we’re starting to get a little bit more granular on how are we actually going to build this retirement paycheck. How are we going to produce this income? We all are familiar with the W2 income, the paycheck we get it once or twice a month. Now, we’ve got to find a way to build that same type of paycheck in retirement. 

So Tim, walk us through three approaches, certainly not the only ones that are out there, but three approaches to building the retirement paycheck.

[00:35:11] TB: Yeah. So the three are going to be the flooring strategy, the bucket strategy, and the systemic withdrawal strategy. So to start with the flooring strategy, so it’s probably going to be the most conservative approach of the three. Critics of this approach will say like, “I don’t want to survive. I want to thrive.” But what the flooring strategy does is it builds an income floor to meet essential expenses with things like Social Security or like an annuity. So the essential expenses might be housing, food, gas, utilities, medical expenses, insurance, maybe debt. 

So that is basically – If we determine that those expenses are, say, $5,500 a month, and we know that Social Security is going to pay us, say, 3,500, then we need to buy, essentially, like an annuity. So think of an annuity as like a private Social Security. So you give an insurance company a sum of money, and then they’re going to pay that back. Usually, it can be for a term certain, but it’s usually for the rest of your life. So you would buy a stream of income to make up the rest of that floor. So that if something were to happen, you always have the essentials met. 

Then the discretionary expenses, there are things like travel and gifts and dining out and entertainment and hobbies, are then basically funded by the portfolio. So you have $2,000 a month of discretionary. Then that money would basically come from the portfolio or could come from like part-time work or something like that. So the flooring strategy is for those that are very conservative, and they want to ensure that for as long as they are alive, they have money to basically keep the lights on and feed themselves. What that typically takes, which is hard for a lot of people, is parting with potentially a good chunk of your income. 

If we use this example, and I don’t know what it would take to get $2,000 worth of income, but say you have a million-dollar portfolio, and you get $2,000 worth of income based on your age, your gender, maybe to part ways with $300,000 or let’s say $300,000 that all of a sudden, you wake up one day, and you have the income stream. But your million-dollar portfolio is now $700,000 that you’re now drawn on for those discretionary expenses. Now –

[00:37:28] TU: You’re trading some of that nest egg for an income stream. Yeah. 

[00:37:32] TB: Exactly. Now, psychologically, they say that that’s tough to get over that hump. But it’s a lot better to do that, versus someone who is in a systematic withdrawal strategy. We will talk about it. That’s drawn down every year. Their portfolio is going down and down and down most years. So just to have that paycheck coming in is from a mental perspective good. 

Now, the bucket strategy is essentially where you set up separate pools of investments with the lowest risk investments in the near term time horizon or segment. Then you have like a middle bucket and then a longer term horizon bucket. The idea is that you would say, okay, bucket one is going to be funded with X amount of dollars, and it will say it’s like five years of spending. So it might have $250,000 in there that is going to be super conservative, and that’s going to be with cash, things like tips, which are inflation-protected bonds, a bond ladder, whichever year creates some type of income for you. 

Then the medium term bucket is going to be more moderate. So that might be for like a 6 to 15-year time horizon, and that could be in like income stocks or like utility stocks and maybe some bonds. Then you have a 15-plus year bucket. That might be the balance of your portfolio that’s more aggressive. So that’s going to be more growth stocks and things like that. The idea is that once the first segment is depleted, so that zero to five-year bucket, that $250 is spent over five years, then the bucket two kind of replenishes bucket one, and then bucket three kind of replenishes bucket two. There’s lots of different rules that you can put into place of how you do that. 

From a conceptual perspective, one of the advantages of this is that clients are like, “Okay, I get this,” and like, “All I’m really worried about is like do I have enough money in bucket one,” and knowing that, although like the market can be crazy, and bucket three is not good right now, I’m not going to touch that for another 15 years. So it’s a way to kind of bucket or segment different money for different purposes. This is one that a lot of advisors use. 

Probably the predominant one is the last one, is systemic withdrawal strategy. So this is based on essentially the work of William Bengen, who researched the all 30-year time periods, and he gets the 4% rule. So the idea here is that you look at your portfolio balance. You look at like what the market – How the portfolio performed and then inflation. Then you essentially – Like if you start the first year and you say, “Okay, it’s a million dollars,” and you get $40,000. Then that year, the market returns 6%, and inflation was 2.9%. Based on those inputs, you then adjust the paycheck, the $40,000 for the next year. 

So you might say when the market is up and inflation is moderate, then you basically give yourself a raise with maybe some caps. If the market is down and inflation is such, maybe you freeze it. Or maybe you actually reduce spending. So it’s a very rule-based way to kind of use the 4% rule as a guide. But to work dynamically year to year with the portfolio and with the market factors that are inflation and those types of things, to make sure that year to year, you’re given the client a paycheck that is sustainable for the longevity of the retirement period. 

Again, there’s a million different ways to kind of skin this as well. But the idea is that you’re working more dynamically with market forces, and it’s based loosely on the 4%. Now, a lot of researchers have said that like the 4% rule won’t necessarily hold up in the future because of when that was done, you have low inflation and really high equity valuations. So that’s important to take note of. Although he did his research, it’s not necessarily indicative of what’s going to happen in the future. 

So you have the flooring strategy, you have the bucket strategy, and then you have the systemic withdrawal strategy, are kind of different approaches on how to build out their retirement paycheck on a year-to-year basis.

[00:41:35] TU: Tim, great stuff. I’m just reflecting on the journey we’ve come over the last four episodes, and we’re going to dive into all of these topics in further detail on future shows. We’re going to be doing webinars. We’re going to have blog posts. Make sure to check out information at yourfinancialpharmacist.com. 

We understand the needs that are out there around retirement planning, wherever someone is at on their financial journey, a new practitioner midcareer, pre-retiree, or those that are even in retirement. So whether you have yet to work with a planner, and this is an opportunity to do so or perhaps you’re working with a planter but are wondering what might else be out there and interested in a second opinion, we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you in terms of learning more about the one-on-one comprehensive financial planning services that are offered by the team at YFP Planning. 

We’ve got five certified financial planners and in-house tax team. That includes a CPA and an IRS enrolled agent, soon to be two IRS enrolled agents. So we’d love an opportunity to learn more about your financial goals, learn more about your situation, and determine whether or not those planning services are a good fit for you. 

You can learn more and book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com. Thanks so much for listening to this series, and we hope you have a great rest of your day. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:42:47] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 274: Risk Tolerance vs Risk Capacity (Retirement Planning)


Risk Tolerance vs Risk Capacity (Retirement Planning)

In part three of the four-part series on retirement planning, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, explain why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you are able to stomach versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term savings goal and considerations for setting asset allocation in alignment with your risk capacity. 

Episode Summary

YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®,  explain the difference between risk tolerance and risk capacity in this episode, the third part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Tim and Tim explain why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you can stomach versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term savings goal, and considerations for setting asset allocation in alignment with your risk capacity. Tim and Tim break down some strategies to employ when your risk tolerance and capacity are not in alignment. They connect the topic of the retirement nest egg to asset allocation. What we determine we need for the nest egg, combined with risk tolerance or risk capacity, will guide asset allocation. Tim Baker shares the value of a financial planner as an objective third-party in making retirement planning decisions, explains how preconceived notions about money impact the financial plan, and mentions early and ongoing financial literacy to increase risk tolerance. The five to ten years leading up to retirement can be a period of uncertainty, and Tim and Tim explain the sequence of returns risk during that time frame. They close with a reminder to revisit asset allocation percentages over time to maintain the amount of risk initially planned.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I continue our four-part retirement planning series by discussing the difference between risk tolerance and risk capacity, and how this impacts your asset allocation plan. Highlights from the show include why it’s critical to evaluate how much risk you’re able to stomach, versus how much risk you should take to achieve your long-term goals. discussing strategies to employ when your risk tolerance and your risk capacity don’t jive and some considerations when setting your asset allocation plan to be in alignment with your risk capacity.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one on one with more than 270 households in 40 plus states. YFP planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional.

If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission on how pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker.

[INTEVIEW]

[00:01:25] TU: Welcome everyone to this week’s episode of the YFP, podcast excited to have Tim Baker alongside me again as we continue our four-part series on retirement planning. On Episode 272, just two weeks ago, we talked about determining how much is enough when you’re saving for retirement. Last week, episode 273, we talked about the alphabet soup of retirement accounts with a focus on those tax advantaged accounts. In this episode, we’re going to focus and dive into further on how to differentiate risk tolerance versus risk capacity, which ultimately leads to how the funds are going to be allocated within your various accounts as you’re putting together your savings strategy, also known as asset allocation.

So, Tim Baker, let’s start with why this topic matters and the connection to the nest egg ultimately, that folks may need to take just about the risks they think two or perhaps even more or less.

[00:02:18] TB: Yeah, I think this is one of the probably the most important concepts to understand. Because I think once you understand it, it’s kind of the easiest thing to adapt to better improve your financial situation, especially for like long term investment for the sake of retirement. So, I think a lot of people leave a lot of meat on the bone with regard to opportunity to improve their financial planning, because they either lack the experience or they don’t understand it, or it’s scary. But I think understanding this concept between what your risk tolerance is and what your risk capacity is, and then adapting that to your portfolio is huge. Again, we’ll kind of talk about conservative Jane versus aggressive Jane and really, all of the factors that are involved in that. One of the easiest ones to kind of change your dial up has to do with risk and ultimately, your asset allocation, which we’ll get into today.

[00:03:08] TU: Yeah, and I think this is a topic, Tim, where like, just being honest with yourself and having some self-awareness on how do I feel about the risk that I’m taking. Obviously, we’re going to talk about the importance of putting that alongside of your goals, do those jive, do they not jive. And I think this is really where the value of a third party can come in as well, when you’re looking at whether it’s one individuals, two individuals doing the financial plan, but often we might need to be both pushed and or held accountable. Obviously, an objective third party can play a really valuable role there.

So, I think we’ve all been told before, at some point or another that, hey, we’ve got to take some risk, if we’re willing to achieve, those big lofty, long term goals that we have. We talked about in episode 272, we need this big number 2, 3, 4 or $5 million, that seems way off into the distance, or perhaps for folks that are a little bit closer to that, not so far off in the distance. But regardless, it can feel overwhelming. And so, we’ve got to take some risk to get to that goal. But I don’t think we often differentiate this concept of risk tolerance versus risk capacity. So, Tim, let’s start there, break these two down in terms of definition of tolerance versus capacity.

[00:04:16] TB: Yeah, the tolerance is what we’ll start with, and this is typically the one that most people understand and know about. When I think of risk tolerance, I think of like the questionnaire. So, probably a buyer’s perspective, one of the things that we need to do to make sure that we’re doing our due diligence with a client is to ask them some questions about their experience, their outlook on the market, their understanding of how stocks and bonds work. If x loss, how they would feel about x loss or x gain and what their actions would be.

So, it’s really based on a questionnaire. From the advisor perspective, it’s really based on what we think the client can handle in a down-market. So, we’re trying to build out the best, and again, what we’re trying to do here, ultimately, is to get the best possible return for the least amount of risk, and that’s what asset allocation is. So, from the investor’s perspective, or in our case, the advisor or the client’s perspective, it’s the amount of risk that you want to take. It’s more of an emotional thing.

To me, that is basically the starting point for the conversation at least. And there are a lot of ways to get about, like what your risk tolerance are. So, one of them is kind of the rule of thumb, and I think I misspoke on a couple episodes back when we talked about this, because I think they’ve actually adapted it, the general rule of thumb. So, the general rule of thumb is that, to get your risk tolerance, you take 110, and then you subtract out your age, and then that gives you the amount of stocks or equities that should be in your portfolio.

So, if you’re 30 years old, 110 minus 30, you should have an 80% of your portfolio in stocks, or equities, and then the remaining 20% in fixed income or bonds. I think that that is a terrible rule of thumb myself. I think that’s a rule of thumb that doesn’t like necessarily hold up. But it’s what a lot of people use to kind of get started. The other way is to kind of go actually go through like a risk questionnaire, and I know Vanguard is one that – you can do that for free, go to their website and basically answer a few questions and it says, “Voila, you are 60/40, or you’re 70/30”, whatever that is. And I would actually start there before using any rule of thumb.

So again, the risk tolerance team is basically what we think you can handle on a down-market, or what you think as a client, you want to take. It’s more of an emotional thing.

If we shift over to risk capacity, this, from an advisor perspective is based on what you can actually handle on a down-market. So, this is actually using some numbers and looking at time horizon, and things like that. So, from your perspective or the investor’s perspective, it’s how much risk you should take. It’s more objective, and factors, and savings rate, goals, time horizons, think things like that. Again, it goes back to that amount of the risk that you can handle.

To give you an example of a risk capacity, versus risk tolerance, say we’re both 40-year-old pharmacists, and me close closer to you, and I’m not a pharmacist. Say, we’re just –

[00:07:23] TU: Coming up. It’s coming up.

[00:07:24] TB: So, if we both take a questionnaire, you could take that questionnaire and be a very savvy investor, have read up on the topic, and you can come back with a very, say, aggressive allocation for where you need to be. And I could do the same thing and come back very, very conservative. So, I could be a 50/50, you could be a 90/10. That’s risk tolerance, is basically based on our inputs in a questionnaire. For risk capacity, it does have to do with the individual itself, but it’s really about, I think, kind of where you’re at in life as well. So, in the same breath, if we’re both 40 years old, and we have 25 years left in the workforce, and we both kind of have the similar amount saved or earning potential, our risk capacity is so much higher than, say, my risk tolerance because I’m scared of the market, because I just have a longer time horizon.

So, where risk capacity is typically the lowest is right at the point of retirement. Because that is typically your longest time horizon, where you have a fixed dollar amount, i.e. your nest egg to work with. So, you just don’t have a lot of room capacity to take a lot of risk. You have to be somewhat conservative. Whereas if you have a longer time horizon, you have good earnings, a good savings, your capacity is a lot, a lot more. Maybe a convoluted way to say it, but to recap, tolerance is kind of like what you feel or like what you want to take. Risk capacity is what you can or what you should take. One of the things that often happens in this, is that those two things are not often equal. So, what we do as a third party is kind of have a conversation about this, and educate a client and sometimes that is over years, because sometimes they’ll say like, “Hey, Tim, I understand what you’re saying, but I just want to be safer.” I’ll say, “Okay, I’m going to bug you about this again.” The next time it’s like, “All right, well, my head didn’t fall off when the market went down 20%. It’s doing what it’s doing. Maybe I’ll be a little bit more aggressive.” And I think that is all the difference when it comes to long-term investing, is making sure that you are – again, you keep expenses low. We’ve talked about that numerous times with regard to your investment portfolio, but your asset allocation, which is based on your risk tolerance, and your risk capacity is set where it needs to be and then the big proponent of that.

[00:10:00] TU: Yeah, this is Tim, where I think the rubber meets the road of what we started this series on, with the nest egg calculation and looking at how much is enough, right? Because you and I could punch numbers in a calculator, or like, “Great, we need 4.2 million 3.7”, whatever the number is, but then we start to get a layer deeper. We talked about the tax advantaged accounts of how we might get there. But the next layer of which we’re getting into today is really that how are we going to invest within these types of accounts, which is the asset allocation. Which, as you just mentioned, comes down to, ultimately our risk capacity and the potential friction that may or may not be there with the risk tolerance.

So, I think that my question here, let’s lean into that situation where there’s a disconnect, where there’s a rub, where I understand what you’re saying, risk tolerance is what I’m able to stomach, risk capacity is maybe what I need to be able to do to get to that nest egg number. So, let’s say I punch in my numbers in the nest egg, they come out at $4.2 million, but then I realized, like, based on the rate of return and the level of aggressiveness that, those numbers are determined upon. I’m not comfortable with that. So, play that out. Is that a scenario where, as you just mentioned, we’re kind of working towards this and getting more comfortable in the long run? Is it adjusting down that nest egg goal? How do you begin to work through this with a client?

[00:11:20] TB: Yeah. The nest egg is a multivariate problem. So, the two defaults that I would always go to is like, if you’re not comfortable with taking more risk, and again, I would say, investing is definitely risky. Of course, it is. But what I would say over a 20 plus year time horizon is actually fairly predictable. We have enough data points that says that the US market, and again, there’s not necessarily any – it’s not past performances are indicative of future performance. But I think we’re not gambling here, we’re not speculating.

So, we’re not taking a bet all on like one stock. But I think if you’re uncomfortable with that, I think, the second thing I would say, is you have to save more though, you have to invest more. When we talked about conservative Jane versus aggressive Jane, and we kind of said, “Hey, conservative Jane, she makes $120,000. She gets 3% cost of Living raises, she saves 10%. She has a 30-year career. And then this is her nest egg.” What’s your income? What’s your cost to live? What do you actually save? And then the time horizon, 30 years. So, the other thing that you could say is like, “Okay, well, maybe we’re not retiring at 65 in 30 years. Maybe we’re retiring at 70.” So, it’s a 35-year career. And that’s the thing is like, you can always work longer. 

One of these things have to give, and that’s why I say like, the easiest thing for me, is to say like, “Look, if you’re 30, 35, 40, even 45, and you have 20 years, left until retirement, who gives a crap if the market goes down in 2022?” But, we as humans, we feel that loss, we’re like, “Man, my portfolio was $200,000 or $20,000, and now it’s $140,000 or $14,000.” You feel those losses. But again, this goes back to like what I was saying, it’s hard for us to conceptualize time, and when the market went down during the pandemic, I don’t even think about that and a lot of people freak out about that. But we know that the market is going to do this, and this is like on a podcast, I’m just waving my hand up and down like a roller coaster. But typically, it’s going in a positive trajectory. You’re just going to have some of those ups and downs.

What I would say is that, if you can stomach those ups and downs and lean more towards equities, you’re going to be better off. I think what people do is they put more bonds or fixed income in their portfolio, to smooth out those rides, even those rides are still the same. But what they do is they make themselves feel better in the near term, at the behest of like long-term performance.

So, on the other side of this, Tim, is like, if we’re talking to the pre-retiree, the person that’s going to retire in the next five years, sometimes you look at that portfolio, and it’s looking at him like, “Whoa, we’re taking way too much risk.” Because if the market does go down 40%, then we don’t have enough time to recover from that. So, it’s really indicative to like, say, “Hey, I’m glad you took risks throughout your working career. But now we got to start protecting the principal.” And this is where you probably want to be the most conservative with your portfolios is kind of that right in the eye of the storm, which is 5 to 10 years plus or minus, your retirement date. And people get that wrong, too. That’s where you almost – you’re at risk for like sequence of return risk, which means that if the market is down, say 20%, 30%, 40%, and then you’re taking 40 or 50 grand out of your portfolio to live on, the failure rate, meaning you’re going to run out of money is so much higher than anything that you could be doing leading up to that.

So, it’s really, really important to know where you are in space and time, and ensure that your portfolio is positioned in a way that’s going to, one, get the best returns, but also protect you. For a lot of us, it’s kind of not knowing. And I would say it’s one of the major missteps that I see, looking at people’s portfolios is a misalignment of that.

[00:15:31] TU: Yeah. Tim, one of the things I’m sensing, at least anecdotally, and talking with pharmacists, about this in various settings, is that the mid-career pharmacist, so I’m thinking about the group that is maybe 10 to 25 years into their career, they’re not yet feeling the retirement date right around the corner, but they’re certainly past kind of the early part of their career. I think there’s a real risk here, as you highlighted. Some of the limitations of the rule of thumb, to get too conservative too early. And I think, in this moment, we’re in a period of volatility right now in the markets. And depending on when people graduated and started investing, this might be the real first significant downturn that they’re feeling in the market, right? You look at even some of the start of the pandemic. That was very short lived. It was significant, to drop. But it was pretty abrupt and recovered quickly.

So, I think this is really – I graduated in 2008. I’ve talked about this on the show before. This is the real first test for me in my portfolio to say, “All right, am I really adhering to my asset allocation plan and what I need to be doing, and the rub potentially the tolerance capacity.” And I think it’s different than a new practitioner, because you have worked hard for 10 or 15 years, you have built up several $100,000 or more of savings, and you’re looking at this saying, “Man, this hurts in the moment.” But if we’re looking 20, 30 years into the future, as you said, over and over again on the show, the worst thing we can do is buy high and sell low. So, the third party here, I think, it’d be really helpful making sure we have a plan to kind of weather the storms. But I specifically am thinking about that mid-career group right now, in this period we’re in of volatility, and they’ve done hard work, they’ve built up some savings, and this might be the first test, of that happening.

[00:17:12] TB: Yeah, I mean, and when those numbers get bigger, you feel that even more, right? I’m human. When I do catch a glance at my portfolio, I’m like, “Oh, is this really?” But I had to step back and look at the long term. I almost have to like detach myself emotionally from it. Because what happens, and I say this all the time is like, when the market just does this, and it’s just a downward plunge, your first reaction is you want to take your investment ball and go home. You don’t want to play anymore. Oftentimes I say, is like, you want to do the exact opposite of how you feel. So, that’s when I reassure myself and I say, “Hey, Tim, you know what, you are putting in x amount of dollars into your 401(k) at every pay period. And now, what you’re buying with those dollars is going. It sets the dollar cost averaging.” So, when it’s up, I’m not buying as many shares, but I’m still like, patting myself on the back, because I’m like, “Yeah, my portfolio is up.” But when it’s down, I have to basically say, “Look, if I’m putting money into my portfolio systematically, on a recurrent basis, which is typically what people do in their 401(k), your dollars are just going farther.” So, then when it does rebound, you’re going to see that impact even more.

So, it is one of those things where it’s, again, it’s not getting caught up in the moment, and it is really looking at the long term. But when you hear the news, or you hear other people talking and there are things that – it gives you pause, and you start to doubt yourself. But I think at the end of the day, what I always say to myself is like I trust the market. I trust what the data has showed. Again, maybe it’s not always going to be 10% when you just sit down for inflation, it’s 6.87%. But always not be that. And sometimes people go to the catastrophic thing. I’m like, “Then we have other problems to worry about, if that’s the case.”

I really believe that, if you look at all this all the things, whether it’s you can make more money, and then potentially save more or you can work longer. To me, the easiest thing to do is to kind of like surrender yourself to the market and say, “Look” – to your point, Tim, like the rule of thumb, it’s this gradual, and I have – I’ll share the camera here, which I’ll be on the video, but this is like a really terrible sketch. Because I was trying to like sketch this out conceptually, because I’ve never showed this. I’m a visual learner. In the rule of thumb, it has you go in and say like, “Okay, if you’re 30, then how do you start in 80% equities?” And then when you go to 40, you’re at 70%. In my mind, I’m like, “No.” Hell to the no. Because it’s just so much lost opportunity.

Whereas mine is more like, my belief and this is more of a capacity thing, is more of a cliff. So, you should be very much mostly equities, and there’s a lot of criticism against an equity portfolio. And again, this is not investment advice. This is not investment advice. But it should be typically closer to the equity or equity portfolio. And then when you get close to that eye of the storm, that’s when you start to basically divest out of equities, and go more to the fixed income, the bonds, and then you go through that eye of the storm where you’re here, and then you start to gradually, as you get to 75, 80, and you’re really looking for combating its longevity risk, which is the fear of the money running out. You need that to last into your 90s, 100, that type of thing. So, you’re going to take more risks on the back end, but typically, you have a more of a handle on spending, and things like that, post eye of the storm time.

So yeah, I mean, no matter where you’re at in life, this is an important conversation to have. And there is no right answer. But I would say that there are wrong answers in my estimation. But I also think it’s important to say that, at the end of the day, we say this about student loans, but at the end of the day, if you’re like waking up and you’re like sweating bullets, because you’re worried about how your investments are faring, especially in a volatile market, then we talk about this with the emergency fund, it’s just not worth that.

[00:21:20] TU: But, something’s got to give.

[00:21:21] TB: Something’s got to give. That means you either have to save more or work longer, and there’s a lot of –

[00:21:27] TU: Spend less.

[00:21:28] TB: Spend less, yeah, which, which is really hard. That’s the one I didn’t mention, because that’s really, really hard to do, for most people. And I think I said on a previous episode, some people look at a 60% to 80% of their income, and that’s basically what they need is. Some advisors just look at what the tax return says, and if you’ve earned $180,000, leading up to retirement, that’s what they plan for, because that’s basically the money that’s flowing through. So, there’s lots of different ways to kind of look at that as well.

[00:21:59] TU: Tim, I think one of the interesting things here is for folks, again, I mentioned the self-awareness thing. I think they really dig deeper about like, where might these beliefs come from. Wherever you are, on kind of the risk tolerance, what you’re able to stomach scale. You mentioned earlier in the show, some folks might be like, “Hey, I’m scared of market. I’ve heard that multiple times. I have no interest kind of investing in the market. Don’t trust it. Not comfortable with the risk, whatever the case may be.” And then there’s obviously the other end of the spectrum, which is like, I’m all in on whatever investment strategy could be equities, could be cryptocurrency, could be real estate, could be a combination of things. I don’t even feel the risk. It’s like, “Man, you could have two people at the same point in their journey, and are just dichotomously in very, very different directions.”

I’m just curious from your life experiences working with clients, is that coming from some of the money scripts and things that were growing up in? Is that coming from experiences like, “Hey, I lived through the 2008 recession. I saw my parents lose a significant amount of their nest egg or grandparent”, whatever be the case. Obviously, the pandemic could have an impact. Where does that come from?

[00:23:13] TB: I think it’s a combination of all those things. I mean, you even look at it, the Great Depression, that generation didn’t put money in banks, because they just didn’t trust banks, and then that can kind of filter through later generations. I think it’s a combination of, kind of your – I think your upbringing, like I would – I talked to my parents, and they’re older now, but even when younger, I think, my mom opened up a Roth IRA for me when I was really, really young, but I think it was like, mainly in cash, or like, very, very conservative bonds, or something like that, that we actually invested in which , again, doesn’t really make any sense if it’s going to be used for 14-year-old in retirement, 50 years later or 60 years later.

So, I think it is a lack of understanding and kind of, I think, a lack of education, or financial literacy around investments is part of it. That’s not anyone’s fault. I just think it should be more part of the curriculum and the things that we talk about as students in grade school, in high school. And again, we kind of talked about you can take out hundreds of thousands of loans, but not really not understand like the financial implications of that. So, I think we need to do a better job of that. I think, again, to go back to my own experience, Tim, we didn’t talk about money growing up. It was very much a taboo thing. So, it was kind of just something that was hands off, which I think kind of does lead to stunted growth in that regard. I think that a more openness to kind of talk through some of these things, and some of like the head trash, I think, a lot of it goes – it does come from your experience. I think there is a curiosity for a lot of people and we see it, where we kind of talked about maybe some missed prioritization of like, you’re invested in penny stocks or individual stocks, but you’re not necessarily taking your match for 401(k) or you have zero emergency fund.

I don’t hate on that too much, because I think it’s someone’s willingness to kind of learn and understand, like how markets work, right? I’ve been in that boat. But I think over time is like, the market is very, very humbling, where you – it’s almost like going to the casino. No one ever says, like, “Oh, man, I lost all this money.” It was like, “I had a great” – those things get lost in the fold. I think that over time, I think people’s experience with the market is, even professional. I just read a headline somewhere that Warren Buffett says, like a monkey could pick stocks better than most financial advisors, which I would agree with. Because there is a lot of randomness with that. So, it’s, again, buy the market, don’t try to beat the market.

I think it’s a little bit of that. It’s experience, it’s education. So, people that are nerds about this, that read up, I think kind of understand what to do. But I think a lot of it is the fingerprints of what our families put on us, and sometimes those things are overcomeable, and we are aware of those things, and sometimes they’re not. Sometimes it takes someone to say, “Maybe we need to look at this a different way.” Because if you want to get to where you need to go, and for a lot of pharmacists, especially if they’re a lot of pharmacists out there, they might be the first person in their family to have graduated from college. They might be the first person that make a six-figure income.

So, with that, comes, I think, a different set of issues and things to think about as you’re – because, again, typically, the higher you are on the income scale, we look at like Social Security, less of your retirement paycheck is coming for security. The lower you are on the income, the majority of your paycheck is going to come from security. So, you just have a different set of issues and things to think about, as you make more money and have that paycheck. So, I think it’s all of those things that can shape your money script, the things that you’re saying to yourself, but I think it also is even deeper than that. It’s kind of the caveman, cavewoman approaches like you don’t want losses, right? So, you want to protect yourself in any way that you can to shield yourself from those losses. So, we do sometimes irrational things just to protect that pain. I think that’s just in our DNA. We’re here today because our ancestors have survived, some didn’t. But as the evolution of sorts is that you are programmed to do things that maybe don’t necessarily make sense in here now.

[00:27:45] TU: Tim, that’s so true. I think it’s human behaviors, you mentioned. But as you’re talking, I can and always will, I think vividly remember the significant losses in my portfolio. You feel more in the moment, but I don’t remember the significant gains in my portfolio. The long-term trend is up in a positive direction, and the significant ups have been bigger than or equal to some of the significant downs. But I don’t remember those. Like I do the losses.

Let’s wrap up this third part of our retirement planning series by connecting all of this to the asset allocation plan. So, what we determined we need is the nest egg. We talked about that in the first episode. What our risk tolerance or capacity is, those two things combined is going to then help us inform what our asset allocation plan is. So, how we actually are going to distribute these dollars within the accounts, the various alphabet soup of accounts we talked about in the last episode. So, what is asset allocation, Tim? Just to find that a little bit further, and then what are the main variables. We’ve obviously talked about one in terms of the risk, but other variables that can impact our asset allocation plan?

[00:28:51] TB: Yeah, so the asset allocation is basically the art, or you can say, even the science of construction of portfolio with a mix of stocks and bonds to achieve the most amount of return for the least amount of risk. That’s what you’re really trying to do. So, at a very strategic level, there’s basically two buckets or two asset classes. There are stocks, which are basically where you own an equity share and a company, and you’re afforded things like dividends and capital appreciation. These are the things that we need to outpace things like the inflation monster, the tax man, et cetera. And then the second part of the portfolio are bonds or fixed incomes, and these are typically IOUs or notes that say, “Hey, government, I’m going to lend you the money.” Or, “Hey, corporation, I’m going to lend you my money. Give it back to me sometime in the future, but give me an interest payment as we go.”

Between the two, typically, bonds are more like a linear growth. Stocks are more exponential growth, but there’s typically more risk with stocks and less versus with bonds. That’s asset allocation in a nutshell. And then what you could do is, you can kind of go more granular in terms of like, “Okay, well, if I have this” – if 80% of my portfolio is going to equities or stocks, you can divide that up between things like large cap, mid cap, small cap, international, emerging market, real estate, that type of thing. And then same thing with bonds, if 20% of your portfolio is going to bonds, you can divide that up between junk bonds or international bonds or short duration bonds, long duration bonds, government bonds, that type of thing.

So, it is more granular. But at a very high level, to tie risk to asset allocation is, either using the rule of thumb, or using some type of risk tolerance, gauge or questionnaire, you can say, “Okay, I’m going to answer these questions. It’s going to say I’m an 80/20 portfolio, maybe a more balanced 60/40 portfolio.” And with that, if you have kind of an unexamined, approach, meaning like, most of the time, I think a lot of people will take that, and that’s how they invest. And I think, what we, as an advisor would do is say, let’s say, “I’m you’re 35, I know what saying you’re at an 80/20. But here are some numbers to show you that you should probably should be more aggressive.” We’re not going to spend this portfolio for another 30 years. Who cares what it does for the next 20, for the next 10, whatever that is. But let’s take a little bit more aggressive. 

So, that’s where you kind of get that talk about risk capacity. And then what you do is say you say, “Okay, we’ll compromise. We’re going to like a 90/10.” Then essentially, if you have $100,000, we’ll just say you’re a government employee with a TSP, if you have 100,000, know that 90,000 is going to go into some type of equity portfolio. So, the big one in TSP would be the C fund, which mimics the S&P 500. And then 10%, would go into the bond fund. That’s basically it. That’s where you connect the risk of where you’re at which again, is partly derived from the things that we just talked about, your upbringing, the head trash that you have, your experience. If you’ve experienced any pain, et cetera. And then, it should be then examined from where you’re at in terms of your time horizon, what you have saved. You’re working with an advisor, obviously. If you don’t have experience, you have a little bit more cred there to come up with, you know, what your final number is for your asset allocation. And then you put that into practice.

And then the idea is that over the course of a year, five years, 10 years, that portfolio is going to drift. So, say you are at 90/10, it could drift to a 95/5. It could drift down to an 80/20 or an 85/15, and you really want to make sure that you rebalance that over time. Because if you don’t, then if you’re an 80/20 portfolio, and you drift to something like a 90/10, if the market was then to go into a spiral, you’re taking more risk than what you signed up initially. So, sometimes when I say to rebalance, it just means to basically lock your percentages back to what you originally had agreed upon with your advisor or with yourself. That’s the big thing. So, you are kind of just resetting the percentages.

[00:33:12] TU: Again, this is a really important connection, as we bring this all together and talk about the value of a third party and the value of a planner that can really help your –it’s not – the value is not coming from picking stocks or picking investments that are going to beat the market. We’ve established that, what you’re describing is more passive investing strategy and here, we’re just talking about investing, which again, is just one part of the financial plan. The value really comes from okay, what is the game plan? What is the life plan? What is a wealthy life look like now? What is retirement life look like? What’s the number for us to get there? What does that mean today? How much do we need to be saving today to get there? We talked about that, in the first part of the series. What accounts are we going to leverage? How do we optimize this tax strategy? And within there, how do we begin to pick the investments, rebalance those portfolios over time.

Again, just such an important reminder, there are a lot of nuances in there alone, but investing is one part of the financial plan. So, we need to take that step back out of this silo that we’re in retirement planning and say, “Okay, what else is going on? What are all the other aspects of the financial plan that are happening? And does that impact or does that change potentially how we’re going to approach our investing plan?” I think, sometimes, we can hear this and hear the passive investing strategy. We can hear the nest egg calculators and think like, I can do that, I’ll just rebalance every once in a while. And you certainly can do it yourself. But let’s not lose sight of what can happen when you bring a third party into the equation, and we also have some value in zooming out and making sure this is fitting in correctly with the rest of the financial plan and the other puzzle pieces that are involved.

[00:34:56] TB: Yeah, the act of investment is a necessary, I don’t want to say evil, but it’s a necessary thing that we need to do to, again, get in front of things like inflation and taxes. A lot of advisors make that the central part of their practice and it is important. I don’t want to say it’s not important. But it typically takes a backseat to a lot of the other things that are going on in life, whether that is, “Hey, I need to pull money out of this investment, because we have to put an additional on our house, because I’m taking care of an aging parent.” Or, “Hey, we have a kid that’s going to college. So, we need to, again, change some things around.” Or, “Hey, I lost my job, so I’m not going to be able to invest like I was.”

The thing with a financial plan is that, the value is more in planning, not the plan. And the investment piece is very important, and it can be as complicated as you want to make it. But even in the simplest version, it can be complicated, because again, if we’re talking about an asset allocation, the example that I gave is in a TSP, but if you’re trying to do that across a brokerage account, an IRA, a Roth IRA, some of the task, it can very quickly, when you add layers, get more and more complicated. But I think that the – yeah, the value, I think, with working and this is at any part of the financial plan, not just the investments. It’s almost like an am I crazy type of – am I crazy to be doing this? Should I give myself permission to do this? And sometimes, because of the environment or the way that we live today with social media, like there’s so much gaslighting. You can almost start to doubt your own judgment. So, it’s sometimes good to have a rock or a steady influence, and this is at, really, any part of your life, but I think finance is what we’re talking about here to just say like, “Hey, am I crazy? Or what do we do here? Or this is a variable or this is a bump in the road? Or this is an opportunity, like what’s the best way to proceed?” Again, super biased. But I think that’s really the value. It’s not necessarily saying like, “Hey, we’re going to beat the market and all that nonsense. It’s like, life has happening, and are we living a wealthy life or not?

[00:37:20] TU: Yeah. And so, to that point, whether you are a new practitioner listening, early on in this journey of saving for the future, mid-career pharmacists wondering, “Hey, am I on track? Are there other things I should be thinking about? How does this fit in with other goals that I’m working towards? Or, pre-retiree, retiree thinking about more the distribution stage and building that retirement paycheck, which we’re going to talk about on our fourth and final part of the series. Regardless of where you’re at in the financial journey, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners, in-house tax team that includes a CPA and an IRS enrolled agent. They’re ready to work with you to build your retirement plan, among work with you on your other financial goals.

So, you can book a free discovery call, learn more about our one on one financial planning services that is customized for the pharmacy professional. You can book that call at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com. Thanks for listening and have a great rest of the week.

[OUTRO]

[00:38:09] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer.

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 273: Alphabet Soup of Retirement Accounts (Retirement Planning)


Alphabet Soup of Retirement Accounts (Retirement Planning)

On this episode, sponsored by Insuring Income, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, for the second part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Together they discuss the alphabet soup of retirement accounts including commonly used vehicles for accruing a nest egg. 

Episode Summary

YFP Co-founders Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®,  discuss the alphabet soup of retirement accounts in this episode, the second part of the four-part series on retirement planning. Tim and Tim know that planning for retirement and building a nest egg can be overwhelming with so much to consider. In this episode, they break down common vehicles for building a nest egg into two main buckets. Tim Baker differentiates between tax-advantaged accounts administered by the employer and those administered by the individual. Tim and Tim spend time discussing how each tax-advantaged account works, including the contribution limits, catch-up provisions, and phase-outs where applicable. They get specific on how not all “buckets” are equal in terms of what you, as the investor or retiree, will receive. Due to the nature of retirement accounts and their relationship to the financial and tax plans, Tim and Tim share the importance of marrying the retirement plan to tax planning for the most benefit to the investor. Lastly, Tim and Tim explain that there are many factors to consider when determining the priority of saving among different tax-advantaged accounts, reference resources for listeners on prioritizing investments, and mention the services provided by YFP Planning and the YFP Tax team for pharmacists. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here. Thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I continue with the second of our four-part series on retirement planning. Last week on Episode 272, we discuss, determining how much is enough for retirement. This week, we take a step forward by talking about the alphabet soup of retirement accounts including commonly used vehicles when occurring a nest egg. Highlights from the show include differentiating tax advantaged accounts into those that are administered by the employer, and those that are administered by you the individual, how each tax advantaged account works, including contribution limits and ketchup provisions, and why not all buckets are created equal, and factors to consider when determining the priority of saving among different tax advantaged retirement accounts. 

Now before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 270 households in 40 plus states. YFP Planning offers fi only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning, financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then a jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:01:39] TU: This week’s podcast episode is brought to you by Insuring Income. Insuring Income is your source for all things term, life insurance and own occupation, disability Insurance. Insuring Income has a relationship with America’s top rated term Life Insurance and Disability Insurance Company, so pharmacists like you, can easily find the best solutions for your personal situation. To better serve you, Insuring Income reviews all applicable carriers in the marketplace for your desired coverage. Supports clients in all 50 states and make sure all of your questions get answered. 

To get quotes and apply for term life or disability insurance, see sample contracts from disability carriers or learn more about these topics. Visit insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist. Again that’s insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:31] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back.

[00:02:33] TB: Yeah, good to be back, Tim. Looking forward to part two of this series. 

[00:02:37] TU: Yes, this is our second part of the four part series we’re doing on retirement planning. Last week, we talked about, How to Determine How Much is Enough? We ran through some mistakes scenarios and calculations to determine that number. This week, we’re going to start to get into more of the X’s and O’s on how to get there. As I mentioned, as we wrapped up last week’s episode, often when we begin to wrap our mind around, okay, this 3 million, this 4 million, this 5 million number and we begin to accept what that is and what we need to be saving each month to get there. 

The next natural question is, all right, where do I actually invest the money? What are the vehicles and options that are available? That’s what we’re going to talk about this week, some of the variety of investment vehicles and we’re primarily going to focus on tax advantaged retirement accounts, but certainly acknowledge that there are a variety of ways to build a nest egg outside of just the accounts that we’re going to talk about. So that could be real estate, that could be digital currency and assets, business ownership collectibles, and knowing many individuals are building a base that comes from, maybe not exclusively includes, but comes from traditional retirement accounts. We’re going to focus our time there. 

Another important distinction I want to make is that for our small business owners that are listening, we know there are several you out there. We will cover not in detail on this episode, but certainly there are other options from a business standpoint, SEP IRA, simple IRA, solo 401K. We’re not going to focus on those in this episode, but certainly, those are a valuable option to get us to our goal, as well. 

Tim, we throw these terms around all the time in pharmacy as notorious for throwing around acronyms. We put together pharmacy and financial planning. I feel like it gets worse. So we throw around term 401K, 457, TSPs, traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, HSAs. This is often when we’re speaking with a group of pharmacists where we start to see the eyes gloss over. Okay, I understand there’s options I need to take advantage of, especially from a tax standpoint, but there’s a lot to consider, this can be overwhelming. We’re going to break this down into two buckets to give ourselves a framework. 

Those tax advantage accounts that are administered by the employer. Then the second bucket is those tax advantage accounts that are administered by you as the individual. So this distinction I think will help us begin to organize and have a framework for how we can think about different options that we have to save. Tim, let’s start with the accounts that are administered by the employer. Give us a rundown of the accounts that are available here and some of the distinctions between them.

[00:05:10] TB: The ones that are typically administered by the employer are going to be the 401K, the 403B, the TSP, those are the three primary ones. Then sometimes you run into things like the 457 plan, which is typically a bonus plan. Sometimes you see 401As, which are like 401Ks, except the participants aren’t making contributions to them. The one that we’ll talk about, synonymous with all the other ones is a 401K. The 401K, is the most popular profit sharing plan. Essentially, how it works is when you are hired by an employer. They’re going to say, “Hey, welcome to the team. As part of a benefit to working on our team, we have this 401K that we’ve set up through fidelity or whatever, whoever the custodian is. These basically are funded through salary deferrals from your paycheck.” 

Back in the day, you had to basically make that election yourself, but the Obama administration, I think, smartly made it, so you have to opt out. A lot of these plans, now you’re auto enrolled at a certain percentage into the plan, I think, based on your age into a target date fund. The backdrop of this, Tim is back in the day, when our dads were starting the career, the most prevalent retirement plan was a defined benefit plan, a pension. What happened over really started in the 80s and 90s, employers were starting to see how big of a burden that was on their own balance sheets, because they were basically carrying the lion’s share of saving for the employees retirement. The 401k was introduced, which is a defined contribution plan and that means that that risk of having enough save for retirement has shifted from the employer to the employee. 

Now it is up to the employee to figure out how much they need to be different from their paycheck, where to invest it, and then how to distribute it tax efficiently in retirement. The problem is that we just aren’t necessarily good at that. The 401K has really taken off and now defined contributions will outpace pensions, as many of us know that do not have pensions. Participants make elective salary deferrals and for anything that doesn’t have Roth in front of it, contributions are not tax until they’re withdrawn. What this means is that, I’m a pharmacist, and I’m making $120,000 a year, and I put 20,000, just for round numbers, the maximum you can put in is 20,500, but let’s say, I put $20,000 into my 401K. The IRS taxes me as if I made $100,000. It goes in pre-tax. 

Now the money is actually, it’s only going to be taxed either going in or going out. That traditional 401K, that $100,000 is going to grow and grow and grow. Then when we pour it out in retirement, that’s when it’s going to be taxed. If we think about this, say I’m going to 25% tax bracket at age, we’ll say 40, it’s not taxed at 25%. It goes in tax free. Now let’s say I’m at age 65, I’m retiring. I’m at a 25% tax bracket. If that $100,000, let’s say, it grows, but that’s going to be taxed at 25%. Your benefit, there’s really no benefit either way. The benefit comes if your tax bracket is actually lower. If you’re at a 20% tax bracket, that’s when you see some of the statements. That’s for the traditional. Now if you are age 50 and older, Tim you can make a $6,500 catch up. 

Now all of these things are the same for a 403B, which is typically 401K you typically see for profit 403B, you typically see for a non-profit or hospital that type of thing. The 403B has an additional catch up and it says typically if you are a certain age and you have a certain years of service, you can put in as typically 15 years you can put an additional $3,000. So you get your 20,500 Plus the 6,500 regular catch up plus another 3000. So that’s just a funky thing with 403Bs. TSPs are very similar to all of them they have the catch-up, not like a 403B, but a regular catch-up. Their matches the same across, so TSPs is the Thrift Savings Plan, typically for military government workers, their match is 5%. The big benefit for the TSP is that they’re in basically five funds that are super low costs, which is not necessarily the case with the 401K or the 403B. 

The appropriate use for these, Tim are typically when If the employer wants to provide a quality retirement benefit, without being required to make ongoing employee contributions. So you can have, you can have an employer that offers a 401K, but doesn’t put any match or anything into it, that’s up to the employer to do that. A lot of employers are doing this to incentivize their employees to save, but also as a retention, because you can have vesting schedules attached to it, which means if you leave after a certain amount of time, you don’t get that match. It’s a great vehicle if you have a young workforce, because you can accumulate savings over a long period of time. But the basically the risk is on the employee to do what they need to do to get to have an adequate retirement.

A lot of 401Ks allow for insert with withdrawals for hardships, you can take loans against it. Most 401K’s these days, same thing with the TSP and the and the 403B have a Roth component. The big disadvantage here, Tim, is that oftentimes a 401K can be expensive. So typically, the rule of thumb is, the smaller the employer, the more expensive the 401K is to that individual participant. I’ve seen it, where all in cost on a 401K is almost 2%. So think of that, I have $100,000 in a 401K, $2,000 per years coming out either to pay an advisor expense ratio or things like that. Whereas something a TSP, it’s like, three basis points, which is $30, compared to 2000. 

Then the other disadvantage is that, it’s not going to guarantee an adequate retirement benefit as a pension would. Oftentimes, again, smaller 401K is the investment selection won’t be great. That’s the main one. Again, all of those, the TSP, the 403B are going to be very, very similar to that without with some minor nuance. The 457 plan, which some people will see is a non-qualified tax advantage, deferred compensation retirement plan. This is typically for people who work in state government, local government, even some nonprofits. This is often another bucket that you can put up to $20,500 into. It’s the same thing they’re typically not taxed until it was withdrawn, but often those are available to the creditors of that. If you work for a local government that goes bankrupt, then you could potentially lose that money, which is problematic. That’s a big thing that some people will see as a 457. So typically, work on the 401K, the 403B first and look at a 457 after you’re maxing that out already.

[00:12:37] TU: Tim, correct me if I’m wrong. When I was at one university, we had the 457 available with a 403B and a 401A, but the 457 amounts was on top of in addition to –

[00:12:49] TB: Correct. Completely separate bucket, yeah. Sometimes we get that – we’re going to talk about those administered at individual levels, some people say, “Well, if I put 20,500 into my 401K, can I also put money into an IRA?” So they’re separate buckets, just like the 457 is a separate bucket that’s available to you.

[00:13:07] TU: Great synopsis. That was covering our first bucket, which is those that are administered by the employer, as Tim articulated, really looking at those interchangeable 401K, 403B, TSP, typically for profit, not for profit, those that work for a federal government agency organization. He talked about the contribution limits per years, some of the catch-up provisions after the age of 50. Then the additional one for the 403B. Then making sure we’re not confusing, a Roth 401K, Roth 403B with a Roth IRA, which we’ll talk about here in a moment. I think as we see the Roth employer sponsored accounts grow in popularity, there’s some confusion among okay, I’m contributing to a Roth 401K, can I also contribute to a Roth IRA? 

The answer to that is yes, there are some considerations there, but totally separate. One administer by the employer when administered by the individual. Let’s shift gears, Tim to that second bucket. Those administered by the individual. Two, subcategories here that I want to talk about would be the IRA accounts, both the traditional and the Roth IRA. Then the second would be an individual that wants to invest in a brokerage accounts. Let’s start with the IRAs differentiate the traditional IRA, the Roth IRA, some of the income limits and considerations for pharmacists that would contribute here.

[00:14:22] TB: Yeah. So same thing, when you see traditional or no precursor at all just IRA, you’re going to think pre-tax, when you see something Roth, you’re going to think after tax. The traditional IRA is a retirement account. It’s the traditional individual retirement account. It is an account that you either set up yourself so you go to something like Fidelity, a Vanguard, TD Ameritrade, a Betterment and you basically open it up or you can work with an advisor and they’ll basically open one up to advise for your benefit. 

The traditional IRA is funded with pre-taxed dollars. Again, this is a separate bucket away from the 401KL, the TSP, etc. you can contribute up to $6,000 per year, plus $1,000 per year catch up if you’re age 50 or older. Now, anybody essentially with earned income can contribute to a traditional IRA. It’s subject to phase out deductions. So what does that mean? If you are a single individual, and you make anywhere from 68,000, to $78,000 like AGI Adjusted Gross Income, then once you get to $78,001, you can no longer take a deduction for your IRA. I’ll give you example on the other side, so if you make less than $68,000, so $67,999, you can deduct 100% of your say $6,000 deduction or contribution. It phases out, which means that once you get to that midpoint, so 68,000, to 78,000 the midpoint is 73,000. 

If you put $6,000 in you can deduct 3000, but then you can’t, which is half of it and you can’t deduct the other 3000. This is really good for people that are listening to the podcasts that might be fellows or residents or maybe they’re in school, and they’re working and they’re trying to save some for retirement, typically, pharmacists are not going to be allowed to make a deductible contribution. So just to give you an example, if I’m out there, and I make $60,000, which is below that, and I’m single, and I make below that threshold, and I put $6,000 into my traditional IRA. The government, the IRS looks at me as if I made 54,000. So similar example, as I used before. 

Now, the difference between the IRA and the 401K is the 401K is coming out of your paycheck. It’s not basically hitting your bank account. This is typically funded where it hits your bank account and you’re technically contributed into that with after tax dollars, but you’re just deducting it on your 1040 when you go to file. That’s a little bit of the nuance. The phase out, if you’re married filing jointly is 109 to 129, which again, typically for a lot of pharmacists if they’re dual income, they’re going to be above that that threshold. The same thing as, so that $6,000 goes in pre-tax, it gets invested, it grows tax free. Then when we pour that out in retirement, when we withdraw it in retirement, that’s when it’s taxed. Again, it’s either tax going in or going out. 

The Roth is the one that’s tax going in. The Roth IRA is an account that’s fun it with after tax dollars and it stays after taxes. You’re not going to take a deduction. So basically, it’s the same thing, you can contribute up to $6,000 plus $1,000 after age 50. Now, and this is an aggregate, if you were to contribute $4,000 a year to your traditional you can only contribute $2,000 to your your Roth IRA. This is subjected to phase outs to actually contribute. So what that means is that once you make as a single person, once you make the phase out is 129 to 144,000. Tim, once you make $144,001 the door slams shut, and you can no longer make a contribution to the Roth IRA. For married filing jointly that ranges 204,000 to 214,000. So if you’re a couple and you make more than 214,000, you can’t directly put money into the Roth IRA, which then gets into that, you fund a traditional IRA, you got to go through all those rules that we talked about and then you can do a backdoor Roth IRA, again easier to explain, harder in actual concept. 

To just reiterate, if I make, we’ll use the same example. Let’s say I make $60,000. I put $6,000 into a Roth IRA. Now, the government looks at me as if I made $60,000 that $6,000 that goes in, it grows tax free. Then when I pour it out in retirement, because it’s already been taxed, that $6,000 is all mine, or whatever it grows to. That’s the big thing that we often talk about is like, if you have a million dollars in your traditional IRA at the end of the rainbow, when you’re going to retire, you don’t have a million dollars. If you’re in a 25% tax bracket, you actually have $750,000 and the government has 250,000. If there’s a million dollars in a Roth IRA or Roth TSP or a Roth 401K, that money is yours. That’s super important to remember. I think I hit everything with Roth.

[00:19:34] TU: Yeah. Then again, Tim, just to zoom out for a moment so in the first segment, we talked about the big security number, what do we need at the end of the rainbow at the nest like three, $4 million. We back that into, okay, what do we need to be saving per month based on a set of assumptions, asset allocation, risk tolerance, all those things? Maybe that number is 800 1200, 1500, whatever it is per month. Now we’re talking about where does that go, right? So we started with employer counts. Is that a 401K, for profit 403, not for profit TSP federal government? Or and or are there individual options, traditional, perhaps maybe not a deductible option there for many pharmacists based on income or a direct Roth or backdoor Roth, depending on income limits for pharmacists. 

If you put these two together, and where we see many pharmacists beginning to build their foundation, again, not the only place that we’re going to be investing 20,500, certainly more than that, for those that are listening, that are in that catch up age, older than 50. Then on the individual side $6,000 per year, so 26,500 per year between the two of those and that 20,500, Tim is not including any employer match as well, right? That’s employee –

[00:20:46] TB: Yeah. If you include the employer match, and anything else they give you, I think the number can go all the way up to 61,000. As long as the employee and the employer match doesn’t exceed, 61,000 you’re good to go, which that’d be nice if you got that much in a match.

 [00:21:02] TU: We put the two of these together. Again, not investment advice, but we put the two of these together, and we’re now north of $2,000 per month towards our savings goal. Is this the only way we can invest? Absolutely not, but these two tax advantage accounts, and there’s a lot of strategy and consideration here. Tim, you mentioned it a few moments ago, tax bracket today, tax brackets in the future, what else is going on in terms of the tax situation, another great example where we need to marry the tax plan with the financial plan, but a really good place to begin to think about the foundation for our investing.

[00:21:33] TB: Yeah. That’s a common question that we have, is like, should we put in Roth, we put it in traditional, should we be putting it in taxable, which we haven’t talked about, the brokerage account, which we can talk about here in a sec. The answer is yes, all of them. Because what we do when we try to build a retirement paycheck, we’re trying to get that money out of those tax advantaged accounts at the lowest tax rate possible. The other thing at the sprinkle in is oftentimes what use the brokerage account for, so often you use a brokerage account for an early retirement or to delay claiming Social Security as long as possible. So you increase that percentage of a known income stream from the government that’s inflation protected, and that is a bigger part of your percentage of income, that’s huge and a lot of people will not do that correctly. 

Before we get to the Brokerage account, the last thing I’ll say about all these accounts that we talked about, so far, the 401K, TSP 403B, Roth traditional IRA, the other one that’s often synonymous with a traditional IRA is a rollover IRA, that’s typically, when you’ll see that’s also pre-tax. Worth mentioning for all of these accounts is that if you take non-qualified withdrawals, which that’s typically when you take money out before you’re 59 and a half years old, you’re subject to a 10% penalty along with paying the tax. That’s basically discouraging you to rob that account for a car, or a home downpayment or things like that. There’s exceptions to that rule, but that 10% penalty it’s a good way for you to keep that money in there. 

Again, we talked about gratification, sometimes it’s really hard for us to lock that money away and not use it until the future. So the brokerage account, Tim, is the last account that we can talk about, and the brokerage account is, it’s a taxable account. It’s an account that you can set up through any of those custodians that I mentioned. It’s funded using after tax dollars. This can either be set up as an individual account, so in your name, just like all your retirement accounts or a joint account with a spouse or a partner. The contributions to this are unlimited. With all these other accounts, we’re saying, “Oh, you can only put $20,000, 500 or $6,000.” Here’s have at it, if you if you get an inheritance, or you’re maxing everything out, and you can put five grand a month or whatever into an account, you can do that. 

You typically use this when you’ve exhausted your retirement contributions previously mentioned. The other one that we of course, always mentioned is the HSA, it’s another bucket, that’s good. You typically use this account when you’ve exhausted those things or if you’re doing something else like, we often use this account for a tax bomb for a non-PSLF strategy. It could be for something that –

[00:24:23] TU: Early retirement. 

[00:24:24] TB: Yeah. It could be something that’s an early retirement. So if I’m going to retire at age 55 and I’m not going to be, I can’t collect on my other accounts until I’m age 59 and a half, you would use it for that or if you’re saying okay, I’m going to retire it 62 or 65. I’m going to delay to claim Social Security to age 70. I’ll use that account from that as well. Those are typically or the last one, which is not necessarily retirement related. You might say, “Hey, Tim, I want to basically buy a piece of real estate investment in 10 years.” I’m like, “Well, that’s probably long enough time horizon where we probably should do something other than a CD or high yield savings account.” So let’s build a balanced portfolio or something along those lines that we can get a little bit more return for a little bit more risk. 

The advantage to the brokerage account is the greatest flexibility, there’s no penalty to withdraw, as I mentioned from the other accounts do, you can recognize losses to offset gains, that’s called tax loss harvesting. That’s one of the big disadvantages that when you put in will use the $6,000. Tim, I put $6,000 into my Roth account or my traditional. When we say it grows tax free, what that means is when you buy mutual fund ABC at $100 per share, when you sell it and withdraw the account and say it’s $300 per share in the future, there is a gain of $200 for that investment. 

Inside of a Roth inside of a Roth IRA, a 401K, a traditional IRA, you don’t have to pay tax on that $200 per share gain, in a taxable or a brokerage account you do so what that means is that you’ve contributed after tax dollars, you made the investment, you have a 200 per share gain, you have to pay either long term capital gains on that, which is typically 0%, 15%, or 20%, most pharmacists are probably going to be in the 15% bracket, or short term capital gains tax, which means you’ve held it for a year or less, that’s typically ordinary income, which is 24% tax bracket plus whatever, in your state. So that’s the big disadvantage that you’re taxed multiple times on that investment, but it allows you flexibility to do what you need, move money in and out. The investment selection is yours and there’s typically less fees, because you don’t have that big administrator typically hanging over it like you do in a 401k or even an IRA.

We often see these, Tim with employee stock purchase programs, so if you’re in an ESPP with your employee, employer, they’ll put those dollars in a taxable account, typically RSUs are granted and they’ll put those dollars or shares and investment accounts, ISOs, that type of thing, as well. There are specific scenarios where you’ll use this, but the brokerage account, again, is often one that we don’t talk about enough for retirement purposes. Sometimes I don’t like to use it especially the further away you are for retirement, because you could say, “Hey, Tim, this is for retirement.” But it’s like, just kidding. Five years later we’re going to use it for something else. 

Now that $50,000 that I accounted for in your nest egg calculation is gone, right? That can be problematic. That 10% penalty, although it stinks, it can be a good firewall for you not to take that money out, but this is another important account to utilize as we’re growing our assets to then disperse in retirement, and we want to make sure that we pick efficiently from a tax perspective from each of these buckets year over year.

[00:28:00] TU: Tim, when you teach this topic, and I think you teach it so effectively, you mentioned earlier that not all buckets are created equal, right? If you have a million dollars in a Roth, a million dollars in a traditional, a million dollars in an HAS, a million in a 401K, a million in a brokerage account, you don’t really have $5 million. I mean, I guess you do on paper, but there’s going to be tax implications that are different. The visual you give for the brokerage is it’s got holes in the bucket, right, because we’re putting money in after tax, and then we’re going to incur either short or long term capital gains doesn’t mean it doesn’t have value, you gave several examples where it could in terms of bridging to delay Social Security, it could be a short or mid-term type of purchase five, 10 years if you want to get some growth momentum for the market, don’t want that sitting in our checking account. So there’s value there, but we also want to make sure we’re looking at the right priority of how we’re investing. 

I think one of the common mistakes that we are seeing, I think in part, just because of the availability in marketing around brokerage accounts is, are we putting money in a brokerage account and perhaps not taking advantage of some of the tax favored accounts we talked about. Is that intentionally the choice we’re making or are we not considering the tax implications by doing that? 

[00:29:09] TB: Yeah. That’s one thing we talked about, it’s a prioritization. We see pharmacists that come in, they have 1000s of dollars in a brokerage account, but they’re not really taking full advantage of match or, and I get it, Tim. I’m not a hater. I get it, because a lot of times we’re marketed to by said company that says “Hey, buy this and invest and you’ll get free bitcoin or ETFs or stock.” I understand the want to scratch the itch and get in and try to make money and invest, but if you think about it, and again, it’s not a bad thing, because you can offset losses, but if I’m being taxed already on if I’m in a 24% tax bracket for that money goes in, and then I’m taxed another 10 or 15% when it from capital gains, but then you can defer that tax or in a pre-tax account or pay it after it comes out. I think that there’s a lot of meat on the bone with regard to efficiency, right? That’s one of the things we preach is just being efficient. 

[00:30:14] TU: Yeah.

[00:30:14] TB: All of these have a place, particularly when talking about the in this retirement series, and there should be attention paid in a strategy and an allocation for each, just asking these questions if you’re listening to this, look at your balance sheet. Always comes back to the balance sheet and the goals. Look at the balance sheet, how much do you have in an after tax? How much do you have in taxable? How much you haven’t pre-tax? And take stock of where you’re at. 

Once you know where you’re at, then you can outline where you want to go. Yeah, I think, it’s really important to look at the priority. Again, I don’t hate on anyone in that, who is doing that. It’s just a matter of focusing and say, “Okay, what is important, what’s not important? Sometimes if we want to do some stock picking and things like that in a brokerage account, let’s just keep it minimum 5% of the overall portfolio, and then we can go from there. I’m a big believer in keep it simple and keep fees low and set the right asset allocation, and then go from there.

[00:31:11] TU: While we’re talking about priority, we’re not going to dig in depth on this episode, because we’ve done it on many others, ruling to 165 is one example, but we can’t omit the HSA when we’re talking about priority of investing. Back to my visual of your brokerage account with the holes in it, the HSA is the bulletproof account, right? Depending on how we’re using that account, we have an opportunity to avoid taxes throughout. Obviously, if we have healthcare expenses that we need to fund, we can, of course, use it for that and have some tax advantages. 

Got to be working for an employer, we have a high deductible health plan that dollars aren’t as big in terms of contributions that we’re going to see in a 401K or 403B, so 3650 for an individual 7300 for family in 2022. Some catch up provisions are again, but another tax optimization strategy that want to be considering. I hope we’re hitting that point home, intentionally is that I think one of the things our planning team does so well and a shout out to the integration between the planning and the tax team is, are those two things in sync? Are we are we planning with a tax mindset? Are we also thinking about the tax implications, but also building the financial plan around that as well? 

Tim, I probably should have mentioned this earlier, but we’ve thrown around a ton of numbers in terms of contribution amounts, we’ve talked about phase outs and AGI limits, and maybe some folks are trying to scratch those down. Hopefully they weren’t doing that when they’re driving, but we have all these numbers available for use, you don’t need to memorize any of those. We’ve got a sheet that has 2022 important numbers, even beyond just what we’re talking about here and investing savings, you can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/2022numbers, again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/2022numbers and get that information. 

Again, this is our second part in a four part series on retirement planning. Next week, we’re going to come back to risk tolerance versus risk capacity, a very important distinction between those and how we begin to determine within these accounts we talked about in this episode, where we actually start to invest the money. Then finally, we’ll wrap up in our fourth part about how to build the retirement paycheck. The team at YFP Planning is ready, whether you’re new practitioner, mid-career pharmacist, someone who is approaching retirement, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners and an in-house tax team, including a CPA and an IRS Enrolled Agent, ready to work with you to help build your retirement plan among your other financial goals as well. 

If you want to learn more about the one-on-one fee only comprehensive financial planning services that are offered by YFP Planning, you can visit yfpplanning.com to book a free discovery call. Thanks for listening. We’ll see you next week as we continue the series on retirement planning. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:33:50] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, let’s hear an important message from our sponsor Insuring Income. If you are in the market to add own occupation, disability insurance, term life insurance, or both, Insuring Income would love to be a resource. Insuring Income has relationships with all of the high quality disability insurance and life insurance carriers you should be considering and can help you design coverage to best protect you and your family. 

Head over to insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist or click on the link in the show notes to request quotes, ask a question or start down your own path of learning more about this necessary protection. 

[OUTRO]

[00:34:27] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on the show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the date publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacists podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 272: How Much Is Enough? (Retirement Planning)


How Much Is Enough? (Retirement Planning)

On today’s episode, sponsored by APhA, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, to discuss how much you need for retirement in part one of the four-part series focused on retirement planning.

Episode Summary

Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, to discuss how much is enough when it comes to retirement planning in part one of the four-part series focused on retirement planning. In this discussion, Tim and Tim cover finding a balance between saving for the future and living a rich life along the way, factors to consider including determining how much is needed when building a nest egg, what the 4% rule is and why it is commonly used as a safe withdrawal rate during retirement, and why time in the market and savings rate matter more than the rate of return on investments. Tim Baker shares his opinion on financial planning as an exercise in goal setting for the long term while balancing experiencing life in the present and how financial planning and even minor changes in your investment portfolio can have a significant impact on your total retirement amount. They dive into what many folks consider a safe savings rate and considerations for increasing that savings rate dependent on numerous factors in the financial plan. Tim and Tim explain the rule of 25, which is popularly used in the FIRE (Financial Independence Retire Early) community as a guideline for retirement savings, how it works, and how it compares to the 4% rule. They close with general calculations and formulas for determining the nest egg for retirement and tease next week’s episode on the “alphabet soup” of retirement accounts.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom.

On this week’s episode, Tim Baker and I kick off a four-part retirement planning series by discussing how to determine how much is enough when it comes to saving for retirement. Highlights from the show include finding a balance of saving for the future, while also living a rich life along the way, as Tim Baker says, “It can’t be just about the ones and zeros in the bank account.” Factors to consider when building a nest egg and determining how much is needed. What the 4% rule is and why it is commonly used as a safe withdrawal rate during retirement. And why time in the market and savings rate matters more than rate of return. Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does, and working one on one with more than 270 households in 40 Plus states.

YFP Planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, who may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning financial planning services are a good fit for, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then jump into my conversation with certified financial planner, Tim Baker.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:01:33] TU: Today’s episode Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast is brought to you by The American Pharmacists Association. APhA has partnered with Your Financial Pharmacist to deliver personalized financial education benefits for APHA members. Throughout the year, APhA will be hosting a number of exclusive webinars covering topics like student loan debt, payoff strategies, home buying, investing, insurance needs, and much more. Join APhA now to gain premier access to these educational resources and to receive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join, and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com/join, and using the coupon code, YFP. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:19] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back on the show.

[00:02:21] TB: Thanks, Tim. Yeah, good to be back.

[00:02:23] TU: It’s been a while. I mean, you’ve done some case studies with the planning team, which have been awesome. But we haven’t been back on the show together in some time, so I’m looking forward to this series that we’re going to be doing on retirement planning. We’ve got a four-part series plan, all about retirement planning, starting with determining how much is enough, what do we need as we look at preparing towards retirement, and ending with strategies and considerations for actually building that retirement paycheck. And a topic that’s often overlooked, we’ll talk about that in detail when we get to that fourth and final part.

I believe we’ve constructed this, Tim, in a way that whether it’s a new practitioner who’s just getting started wondering what’s this big scary number for off in the future, or someone who’s mid-career checking in to see if they’re on track, or pre-retiree thinking about, “Hey, this is coming up, and are there some tweaks that I need to make, or adjustments or perhaps confirmation that I’m on track.” I think this topic is relevant, regardless of where someone is at, at their career.

So, we’re going to get into the dollars and cents. We’re going to nerd out on the nest egg and some of the X’s and O’s. But first, I think it’s valuable that we consider what is the purpose, what’s the vision for what we’re trying to do before we start thinking about, is it 3 million? Is it 4 million? Is it 5 million? So, Tim, talk to us about number one, why is this so important before we actually determine how much is enough, and then how are we going to get there? And how do we practically begin to accomplish defining the vision that we have when we think about retirement, and what that life will look like?

[00:03:57] TB: Yeah, so comprehensive financial planning, to me, it really boils down to the idea of how do I best go about living a wealthy life today, say in my 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, and a wealthy life tomorrow. We typically think of tomorrow, more in terms of like the long-term horizon of in my, 60s, 70s, 80s, 90s through retirement. It can be really difficult for us, Tim, to kind of conceptualize time, or like, feel time. So, the further, when we kind of talked to clients, and we say like, what does success look like a year out, two years out, three years out, five years out, those conversations are a lot easier to have. But as that time horizon becomes more and more, we kind of lose sight of how to even like think in decades.

So, to me, that’s what comprehensive financial planning, is about is kind of coming up with solutions where you feel good about what you’re doing today and then what you’re planning for the long tomorrow. And I think what often happens is that individuals, kind of swing one way or the other. So, like in our household, I’m thinking about, “Oh, man, are we saving enough for retirement? Are we doing everything from the long term?” Whereas my wife is like, “Bro, we have two young kids, we need to make sure that we’re doing things with them while they’re young, and they’re still under our roof and all that kind of stuff.”

I actually think some people think that that’s like not a good thing, if you have two partners that are kind of diametrically opposed. I think it’s good, because I think it leads to balance and leads to address some of those conversations. So, if you’re all one way, then sometimes it’s really hard. If you’re like, save, save, save, it’s really hard for you to open up your hand and spend. But the other thing, sometimes people are afraid to talk about a planner is like, “I’m very spendthrifty. I’m not saving enough for the future, because I can’t see two feet in front of my face”, or just, “I grew up in an environment where we didn’t really save. We just kind of live for today and hope for the best.”

So, to me, this whole thing of like, how much is enough? It’s kind of an exercise in that and projecting out, okay, what is a reasonable number that we should be shooting for? And are we doing what we need to do to get there? I think the disconnect with this is, oftentimes, you’ll get a statement, Tim, or you’ll talk to a financial planner, and it’s like, “Oh, you need $4 million to retire.” It’s like, that’s such a big number and I look at what’s in my account, and I’m like, “Yeah, right.” It doesn’t even calculate or compute. So then, it’s almost like you give up, right?

But the problem is, is that the number for a lot of our listeners, it’s going to be multi millions that they’re not going to need to save more than likely. And we’ll get into things like, where does security play a role? And if that’ll be there, and all that kind of stuff? But to me, that’s really the exercise. Are we doing what we need to do today? And then are we doing what we need to do to ensure that we’re good to go for tomorrow. I think it’s about as simple as that, and I think when you talk about retirement planning, you’re looking at the full breadth of the timeline, and making sure that – because it just gets – the longer that you wait, I kind of look at it as, if you started in your 20s, you’re climbing like a steady grade. If you start in your 60s, its Mount Everest, because you literally can’t save enough to kind of overcome that, and the alternative is just a huge cut in your lifestyle, and what you’re going to be able to afford when you do turn off that W-2 or income that’s coming in every two weeks.

[00:07:47] TU: Yeah, and I think so many people, as you mentioned, feel defeated by and we’ll talk about the nest egg numbers and kind of how we get there. I think for many folks, maybe there’s confirmation of, “Hey, I am on track.” And for others, they’re like, they hit the stop button, because they’re like, “No way this is going to happen for me in the future.” Because of, it’s hard to really believe in trust the process and time value of money and compound interest and growth, and that’s a future thing. That’s a tomorrow thing. And as you mentioned, it’s hard to see and imagine our future selves, especially when we’ve got things right in front of us today. And so, this is where the balance comes in. We’re going to go through this exercise of how much is enough. But as we talked about over and over and over again on the show, like an investing retirement plan is another great example of that, we can’t look at any one of these in a silo because for many, if not everyone listening, this is not the only thing they’re worried about, right?

[00:08:39] TB: Yeah. And just to go back to that, like in terms of the numbers, basically, I was doing some research for the case study that we recently recorded with Kelly and Robert, and I was trying to construct, what was the reasonable purchase price for a home in Portland, Oregon. The average, I think, was something like $88,000, or something like that in the late ‘80s. So, think about that, like those numbers. And again, when I typically talk about investments, and I talk about the secret ninja, the termite that is inflation, I always say that, what is it, that $4 latte at Starbucks in 30 years is going to cost north of 10. Or my dad will say, “A nickel would buy the whole candy store.” Now, a nickel doesn’t buy anything. When he’s grown up, he’s growing up in the ‘40s and ‘50s.

So, yeah, and to your point like, it is one – the investment and the retirement piece is one of many, many things that you have to consider. Just the overall risk to your wealth and planning for a catastrophic event is huge. Things like taxes, which are so overlooked, and how to pay your fair share, but then mitigate how much your – there’s so many things that kind of go into this, and a lot of it, we will talk about today, it’s not even about the rate of return or anything like that. It’s just about putting money in bucket.

[00:10:00] TU: Time and money.

[00:10:01] TB: Yeah, and it’s more about the savings rate, then the rate of return. So, even those mechanics and like the behavioral finance, that kind of bleeds into everything, it’s just so imperative that we’re looking at this and examining it. And unfortunately, because either it’s a boring topic, or it’s a painful topic, or we have head trash related to it with our upbringing, or name a number of reasons why we don’t necessarily want to look at this or work on it, it just becomes harder and harder as we go.

To give you some numbers, Tim. So, if you look at a pharmacist with medium pay, and they’re saving about 15% of income with an average annual rate of 6%, which is about what the market returns. So, that’s a fairly aggressive portfolio. If you started at age 25, by the time that you reach age 60, you have a portfolio of $2.6 million. Now, if you’re at age 25, and you’re saving 15%, and you’re an aggressive, that’s pretty good. The fact of the matter is, is that you’re probably not doing – a lot of people are not saving 15%, right off the bat.

At 30, when you get to – so you have 30 years now of accumulation, it goes to 1.8 million. So, a pretty big drop. At 35, just five years later, so 35 to 60, 1.2. If you start to the ripe age of 40, turning 40 this year, Tim, to age 60, so just 20 years, now, you’re not even crossing that million dollars. You’re at 822,000. So, a lot of this is just the mechanics of it’s better than what it was in the past. In the past, if you had a 401(k), you actually had to like sign up. Now, a lot of them will auto enroll you, so you are getting out of the way. But what I would encourage people if they’re not thinking about this, is add that 1% or that 2% every year, so you can get to that 15% or 16%. 

During one of my recent courses, they were looking at what is the – everyone talks about the safe withdrawal rate. We’ll talk about that, the 4%. But what’s the safe savings rate? And the number that I remember is about 16%. So, if you are enrolled in your 401(k) and auto enrolled you at five, you are ways away. So, then the flip side of that is for you to make up, you’re going to have to be saving 20%, 25%, 30% later in your career to kind of make up for that. So, these are all things to kind of be mindful of as you’re navigating this minefield, so to speak.

[00:12:24] TU: Yeah. I think we’ve all had a parent, grandparent, friend, mentor, colleague. Somebody has told us, you got to start saving as early as you possibly can. And the numbers you just gave highlight that. If you start at 25, instead of 30, you’re adding about a million dollars. If you started 25 instead of 35, 1.5 extra, and that’s just simple math savings calculator, time value of money. And those numbers are hard to believe. But it becomes at a point where you see the exponential growth of those funds, but it feels like a grind for that first 10, 12 years, and you start to see the time value of money work, it’s magic. It really is 76ers style, trust the process long-term.

[00:13:03] TB: Trust the process, Jojo.

[00:13:04] TU: It’s hard, though, right? Because what did we talk about in this show? Homebuying with student loans, all these competing priorities. We got to have an emergency fund, we’ve got to be – we know folks are working hard to save for kid’s college while they’re also caring for elderly parents. We want to travel. I mean, all of these competing priorities, and pharmacists make a great income. But at the end of the day, there’s only so much to go around. And so, we’re not suggesting that this is an easy drop in the bucket, but something that we need to be intentional and consider with the rest of the plan.

[00:13:34] TB: I’ll say like, in our household, I’m always like, “Hey, can we increase your 401(k)?” “No.” It’s a battle in my household. And I’m like, “I do this for a living. Trust me.” But it’s that pool again. So, I’m like, “Okay. But if that’s taken away from what’s actually in our bank account, and then funding some of these other goals.” So, it’s a struggle. I mean, it’s a struggle in our household. And again, I probably am too diligent on the future, and not so much on the present, although I think some of the things that we’ve done in our financial plan is kind of said otherwise. But this is – it’s such a human thing, right? Because it’s that delayed gratification. But it is one of those things that if you can understand how to tweak it now, potentially early in your career, or even to say, even later in your career, knowing what to do for the final 5 to 10 years of your career can make all the difference.

The other side of that is, things like, what is your asset allocation when you’re in your 50s, if you’re trying to retire at 60? What do you what are you doing from a Social Security claiming strategy? Is there a way to lock an income through like an – there’s a ton of things that you can do to shore up your prospects, that just like what we see with student loans is kind of, sometimes you just follow the crowd. “Oh, my co-worker is doing this, so I’m doing that.” That never go goes away. “My brother in law is doing this, so I’m going to claim here.”

So, to me, it’s what I often say is like, you don’t have the same goals or the same balance sheet as whoever that is. But it’s hard to basically discern, “Hey, this is my situation. This is what I’m trying to do.” And wave through all of the stuff that’s out there to say, “Okay, this is the right – this is a clear path.” It’s just tough, and there’s so many variables that go into it.

[00:15:27] TU: Tim, one thing I want to share, and you’ve done a good job of opening my eyes to this, and we see this with clients over and over again, before we get into the numbers in the weeds is that we often talk about saving for retirement from a scarcity standpoint, as a, “Hey, I might not have enough, or are we going to fall short.” But we see many instances where you could argue like, is someone saving too much? And I think the value of this exercise, as you mentioned, is we have to find this balance between taking care of our future self and living a rich life today.

So, if we have a quick start in our retirement, we run the nest egg, and we see we’re not running a monthly deficit, perhaps there’s a surplus there, that begs the question of like, are we living the rich life today? So, just like an opportunity cost, of having too much in the emergency fund, there could be an opportunity cost of too much in a retirement account. Maybe a good problem to have, but it’s a problem, nonetheless. So, we’re going to talk about the balance of that, and I think that side gets overlooked often when we talk about retirement planning.

[00:16:24] TB: Yeah, I mean, we’ve definitely had clients that come in, where we actually do the analysis and it’s like, “You’re going to be fine.” So, we can afford to dial this back. And it’s not just retirement accounts, it’s education, especially if we kind of reframe what is the goal around education? What is the goal around retirement? A lot of the times, Tim, especially if you’re on the younger end of things, we’re planning as if so security’s not going to be there. So, you’re shouldering this all yourself. But the fact is, is that there’s a stat that says today, about 50% of people have Social Security makes up 40% of their income, or it’s flipped, the other way around. So, that’s not going to zero. It might be 25, it might be 30, and we can talk about Social Security more in detail. But if you think about that, and we say, okay, for every $10 that you’re going to spend on Social Security, or every $10 in your paycheck, $4 of that is going to come from Social Security. And if you claim right, that number gets bigger and bigger. If you kind of go through a proper claiming strategy, that’s huge.

So, we kind of plan as if like the worst-case scenario, that’s not going to be there. But if we can kind of back some of those numbers. If we use today’s averages, or maybe even like, on the low end, it really lends itself to saying, “Hey, this is not so bad. Again, if you have a lot of time.” Now, if you’re up against it, there’s a lot less wiggle room. It’s almost like you’re trying to steer the Titanic away from the iceberg. The closer that you are, the harder it is just to get around it. If you have miles, like a lot of younger pharmacists do, a few tweaks here and there just makes all the difference. And that could just be from again, the contribution rate, the allocation, or even just doing it and saying like, where am I tracking to like where we’re currently contributing, and then maybe back that off to then enjoy more today. Which I think is something that’s very unusual, because I feel like most financial planners will say, as much as you can, save. Because the more money you have, the more options you have.

But my view is, you can do that, and I kind of look at it as you can stick your head and run through the rose bushes to get your soccer ball. But you’re not really enjoying yourself on the way through. So, I think that’s where that balance comes through. I remember having conversations with clients about this very early when we were going through this of like, we back this off, we buy the home sooner, maybe we start our family sooner because of what this analysis shows us.

[00:19:03] TU: Start the business.

[00:19:05] TB: Yeah, exactly. Exactly, right. And to me, that is power. That’s options, right? So, that’s why I’m just a big believer in a plan and planning. It’s a dynamic thing.

[00:19:15] TU: Yeah. And I bring that up, because again, I think we don’t talk about much of that side of it, and it is more from that scarcity mindset. But I just heard from a client yesterday, it said, one of the greatest values I’ve gotten from the planning team is the permission to spend in an area that they have determined as richest in their own lives. And that was around hosting and welcoming people into their home. And obviously, there’s costs that come with hosting. But at the end of the day, if you’ve got 3.2 versus 4.1, but you’re going to look back on all those memories of friends and people in your home. What are you going to remember, right? I mean, it’s an obvious – so yeah, we got to take care of the future self, but also are we making sure that we’re living a rich life today.

Let’s talk dollars and cents. How much is needed? How much is enough? And there’s different ways of doing this. I want to start him kind of back of napkin math. Disclaimer here is that, this is certainly not the advice of, “Hey, I run some numbers. I punch some things in a calculator, and I know exactly what I need for retirement.” So, we’re going to plant some seeds. But there’s obviously a lot of in-depth analysis that goes into this. But I want to start with the rule of 25, which is a common quick math that’s used in the Financial Independence Retire Early Community, the FIRE Community, which says take 25 times your annual expenses, and that’s roughly the estimated amount that you’ll need to achieve financial independence.

So, let’s say someone’s listening and they look at okay, if I had about $100,000 per year of annual expenses, 25 times 100,000, I need about $2.5 million to get to the point of financial independence. And what that is really referring to, is the amount that you would need to have invested in a conventional stock and bond portfolio. We’ll talk a little bit more about that throughout this series, to probably, keyword “probably”, consider yourself financially independent, that you could not depend upon work income and be able to draw from that portfolio without concern that you’re going to be running out of money sooner than would be desired. And that comes from, Tim, and I want you to break this down a little bit further. That rule of 25, the inverse of that comes from the 4% rule, which as you mentioned just a few moments ago is about this concept of safe withdrawal rate.

So, break that down a little bit more for us. We’ll talk about this in depth when we get to the retirement paycheck piece. But what is the 4% rule? And I know this has been debated, but why might this be a good starting point for us to think about what’s needed in a portfolio?

[00:21:38] TB: Yeah, so the safe withdrawal rate is based on the work by William Bengen. And what he did was he looked at all of the historical rates of return for a portfolio and I think he did like a 60/40, portfolio 60% in equities, 40% in bonds, and he used a time horizon of 30 years. Basically, what he was trying to figure out is, what is the amount of money that can draw from the worst 30-year period where at the end of that 30-year period, there would still be money left over? So, the money would not run out.

He did the analysis and basically came out with – and I forget what the year. I think it was like 1961 to 1991? Or maybe it was like –

[00:22:31] TU: Yeah, it sounds right.

[00:22:32] TB: Yeah, right around, I think it was like ‘60s and ;90s and 4% — so what that presumes is that all of the other roll on your peers, you could actually take out more, and still be okay. But the worst period in, I think, he did it since like the 1920s all the way up until I think 2012. The worst period of that 30-year period was from the ‘60s to the ‘90s, and the safe withdrawal rate where their money was not going to run out was 4%. Now, there’s been a ton of debate of whether that is. It disregards things like taxes, it disregards things like fees associated, so whether you’re working with other fees, it disregards, kind of adjusting portfolio as you go through those 30 years.

And then the other thing is that, one of the observations of late is that for a lot of retirees in this low interest rate environment, obviously, it’s ticked up here this year, and equities performing what they’re performing, maybe 4% is not necessarily a good role going forward. So, there’s a lot of debate about that, and can you set it for 4% and be good to go? Maybe. But that’s basically what it’s based on. It’s like, okay, what is the worst, and when they’ve tested it in other, say, like, Italy, it failed, where this basically was successful 100% of the time, in that same period, it failed 80% of the time in Italy. Not to say that we would have, but they were dealing with a lot of inflation and things like that.

So, that’s basically it. So, the inverse to your point is 25 times your annual expenses. The problem with the annual expenses, Tim, is that if you ask somebody like what’s your annual expenses, unless they’re a FIRE nerd, they’re not going to know. And even that, when you’re trying to back into building a retirement paycheck, I know some financial planners, they don’t even ask the client for their annual expenses. They just assume that everything on their W-2 is basically they’re going to spend.

[00:24:29] TU: Their income, yeah.

[00:24:29] TB: And there’s other ways that you can discount and things like that. But that’s kind of where you get to it. I wouldn’t say that rule, I like rules of thumbs because they’re easy to remember, right? We talk about rules of thumb and other parts of the financial plan. So, if it’s $100,000, 2.5 million, I don’t think that that’s necessarily something that is not a bad thing to at least have in your back of your mind to shoot for. But there’s a lot of gray and again, a lot of gray with the accumulation but then also the kind of withdrawal phase of like, “Okay, I have this pot of money where there’s 2.5 or 4 million. How do I actually turn that into a paycheck that’s going to sustain me for the rest of my life?” And that’s a difficult kind of thing to tackle.

[00:25:09] TU: Yeah, and we’re going to cover that in more depth in the retirement paycheck part of the series. And obviously, we’ll dig into that after that as well. But just to bring my example back here. So, 2.5 was the number that we determined. Again, 4%, inverse of the rule 25. So, 2.5, 4% of 2.5 would be $100,000. So, that would be the idea, and correct me if I’m wrong, Tim. But I think the 4% rule also suggests that you’re essentially bumping that up 3% per year for inflation. So, the 100 would become 103, and then you would continue that on into the future. 

So, there are a lot of nuances in there. You mentioned tax is one. Obviously, what types of accounts do you have saved up. We’re in a time period like we’re in right now, where inflation is obviously a lot higher than 3%. That can have an impact. So, if folks want to just back up napkin, okay, maybe three, three and a half, well, three would be 33 times annual expenses, you can run some of these numbers and kind of see what they would shake out to be.

Tim, let’s get a layer deeper then, which is the nest egg calculation, something that our planning team and works with our clients a lot on, which is we’re trying to get more specific about the individual circumstances for that client, what they currently have, say, projected age of retirement, how long they might live, how does Social Security factor in. And then ultimately, I think one of the great outcomes of a nest egg calculation is getting out of this monopoly money state of mind of 3, 4, $5 million into the future that I can’t relate to, to what I actually need next month, and the month after, and making this tangible as a part of the monthly planning.

So, tell us a little bit, high level, about the nest egg calculation and what are some of the factors we’re considering to ultimately get to that? Are we on track? Or are we not on track for what it’s enough?

[00:26:58] TB: Yeah, so I feel like very early in my financial planning career, I looked at the different approaches to this particular question of like, do we have enough? There are other things like Monte Carlo analysis, which we can talk about, or bootstrapping, which we can talk about briefly after this. But I found that doing the nest egg calculation was really important. But when I did it in my last firm, we would basically stop at, “Hey, you need 3 million, Tim.” And then we would move on to, “This is what you need to do for insurance or your state plan or whatever.” It was, like you said, it was like monopoly money. Nothing about that connect it to the client, especially if the further away they were. I went out to reference that. If it’s like you have a million dollars and need 1.5, and you’re four or five or six years away, then that obviously connects.

So, what I basically did was, I was like, okay, I asked the question, how can we make this more digestible? I’ll walk through kind of high level of the nest egg, and then I kind of see how we pivot from there. What we do is we take a client, we take their current age, we take what their target retirement age, which for a lot of people, it’s like, I don’t know, 65, or maybe it’s full retirement age for a lot of – 67. And that gives us the work life expectancy. That’s basically the amount of time left that you have to work for the man. That’s your timeline, your career timeline. 

And then we look at what their life expectancy is, which you can go on to socialsecurity.gov, right now, put in your birth date, your gender, and it’ll spit out the year and the month you’re going to die. So, for me, it’s like 86.8 years old. Now, what most financial planners will do is they’ll go a little bit beyond that. So, 90 to 100. A lot of like financial planning software will go to age 100. You just kind of pick what is a good timeline for you. If you take the number that you’re going to retire at 67, for an example, and then say, we’re going to die at 95, then you have 28 years of basically, retirement, senior unemployment. And that’s what makes us really hard, Tim, is that we’re trying to solve an equation without all the variables, right? We don’t know when we’re going to pass away. So, we just make some assumptions. And then we look at what do we currently have in retirement savings, so that’s all the 401(k)’s, IRA’s, all the alphabet soup that we’ll talk about in the series.

And then what is your current income? Now, we use current income because we use a discounted amount called your wage replacement ratio, to kind of figure out what the need is in retirement. So, a lot of planners will use 60% to 80%. You just kind of figure out what that is. The logic behind that is that, as you are leading up to retirement, a big part of your paycheck, 20%, 30% is going to be just saving for retirement, and then when you retire, you’re not going to be doing that anymore. Then you have to make assumptions about what your portfolio looks like, so that’s where we kind of go into like a 6%. That’s a pretty aggressive portfolio. And then what that would look like in terms of draw down, and that gets your total needs.

So, as an example, if we look at a pharmacist that makes $120,000, and has $40,000, in the retirement accounts. They’re age 30. They’re going to basically work to 67. That’s 37 years. So, we start with at $120,000, and say, the wage replacement is 70%. That means that we need to plan for, 84,000. So, that’s 70% of 120. Now, if we zero out Social Security, that means that we’re planning the whole need ourselves, that’s 84,000. Now, in 37 years, Tim, when I’m 67, that’s going to be equivalent to about a quarter million dollars. What that means is that every year from 67 to 95, when I die, I need a quarter million dollars to live, which that’s where that kind of gets wonky, because you’re saying, okay, 84,000 is the same as 250,000 in 37 years. And the answer is yes.

[00:30:59] TU: Yeah. Tim, that’s the piece, like, as we’ve talked to so many groups on this. And obviously, for those listening that are near retirement, again, the disconnect is not there, because you’re close to that dollar, and you understand what the inflation that’s happened over time. But when we’re speaking with a group that’s earlier in their career, this is where they see the 3, 4 or 5 million and they’re like, “You all are crazy. The numbers don’t add up. How much money you need?” It’s because we’re thinking about in terms of today’s dollars versus future dollars.

[00:31:27] TB: Right. Correct. So, if we look at that, and you’re like, “Okay, quarter million dollars”, what do I need in the portfolio to sustain a quarter million dollars, essentially, for 28 years between ‘67 and ‘95? And the answer is about 4.4 million. Now, we know that social security is going to be there. So, even if we use something like nominal, and we say that the annual Social Security benefit is going to be something like 30,000, that drops it down to 2.8. So, it is a huge thing, but again, we zero that out. So then, we say, okay, let’s go at 4.4. And you say, okay, Social Security is going to be there. But let’s plan this, we’re going to do it all by ourselves.

That means that for us to get to 4.4, if we assume that we have $40,000 saved already, it’s basically a thousand bucks that we need to invest monthly with that current $40,000. So, to me, this is like the special sauce where I’m like, “Okay, 4.4 doesn’t really mean anything to me. So, how do I make it mean something?” We basically discount it back to like, how will it mean for me today? So, if we basically make a payment, this is a time value money calculation of $40,000, and we assume certain return everything, it’s $1,000. So, then what we do is we say, “Okay, client, how much are you putting into your 401(k), 5%? Okay, so 5% of 120? What’s your max, 3%? Okay, 3% of 120. That’s actually $800. So, 1,000 minus 800, the deficit is about 200 bucks. That’s basically on a monthly basis, where we have about $200 per month drag to get to that 4.4 million.

[00:33:07] TU: But 4.4 just became tangible, all of a sudden, right?

[00:33:10] TB: Right. That doesn’t necessarily account for everything like, fees, and taxes and all that kind of stuff. We’re just going to drag. But the idea is that, then we can say, okay, well, what happens if we max out the IRA? Or what happens if this isn’t an 80/20 portfolio, which is more conservative than like the example that we gave? What happens if we take a little bit more risk? What happens if we do this or that?  That, to me, is where you could say, “Wow, we’re actually a lot further along than we thought. We have more options here.”

So, to me, the nest egg calculation, it’s a time value money calculator, that usually gives you this big pot of money that you need. But I think, the special sauce is to kind of discount it back for it, actually means something to me today. And that’s where, I think, great planning can kind of come from there.

[00:33:58] TU: Yeah, and I think one of the things we hear a lot from prospective clients. I know Justin does when he’s talking with folks, and we certainly see the value of this coming to clarity in the planning process, is this is one of those topics for good reason that there’s a lot of anxiety and uneasiness, because it’s a, as we’ve talked about, big number. It’s out in the future. We get into the what if scenarios. What if I don’t have enough? What about this? Am I going to be able to care for my family? Do the things I want to do? And we underestimate, in my opinion, we underestimate the mental toll that that running conversation has in our head. Do I have enough? Will I have enough? What about this? Could we be doing more? And whether we like the numbers, whether we punch this number and we see a thousand, we’re like, “Tim, I’m never working with you again. Don’t show me this number again.” But we have a picture of what’s it going to take each month. And just like we talked about budget and other things, what do we need to do? What do we need to change? Or perhaps nothing to make this goal a reality. So, we’re bringing the unknown, big scary parts of the plan into reality, and something that we can address on a month by month basis, and begin to work a plan if we don’t have it yet in place, that allows us to hopefully make this goal a reality.

[00:35:09] TB: Yeah, it’s so true. And I think that’s why it can be such a cliff to get over, is because when you’re going through this process, you’re setting things up. But idea is that, once you get past the initial setup, life is going to change, and you’re always going to have challenges. But if you know, it’s kind of like what we were talking about, I think before we turned the mic on. If you know in the background, that you’re funding these goals, whether they’re near term or long term, it’s like, that can kind of create scarcity, because you are kind of being very deliberate with how you’re directed money. In the back of your mind, you still know that you’re doing the pay yourself first, or you’re putting those goals that are really important for you and your family at the forefront.

Whereas, if you just throw everything into a pot of money, you’re not clearly distinguishing what are we actually doing? So, to me, that’s super important. A lot of it is like for retirement is, in this case, jacking the employee contribution up 1% or 2%, fixes it, without doing anything else at all. The other thing you could do is just change the allocation to aggressive, and you’re 200 to the to the front side of it. You’re 200 to the good side of it. And that’s what we talk about when we speak about investment, and kind of aggressive Jane and conservative Jane, and kind of highlight in what little tweaks to your portfolio can do. It’s huge. And not doing that, is to your point, can cause that mental bandwidth and kind of caused you to not do anything at all, which is not necessarily good either.

[00:36:49] TU: Yeah, Tim, this is a great start to this series, and starting with a question of how much do I need? And even before that question of where am I going and why am I going in that direction? Right? So, we talked about living a rich life today, making sure we’re taking care of our future selves. And before we talk about, which we’re going to on the next episode, some of the actual X’s and O’s. What are the vehicles that we could use to be able to begin to build this portfolio? So, once we identify, we need three, we need four, we need four and a half, whatever that number is. The next natural question is, “Well, how do I get there? What do I do? What are the options that I have available?” So, we’re going to talk about that on the next episode, but this episode is really about laying the foundation around how much is enough? And what are some of the factors that I may use to begin to make that determination?

Of course, we’re biased, but the team at YFP Planning, whether you’re a new practitioner, whether you’re in the middle of your career, whether you’re nearing retirement, or maybe have already gotten to the point of retirement, our fee only financial planning team of five certified financial planners and our in-house tax team, including a CPA, and an IRS enrolled agent, they’re ready to work with you to build a retirement plan among other financial goals that you’re working on as well.

So, if you’re interested in learning more about our one on one comprehensive financial planning services, you can book a free discovery call. To learn more about that service, determine whether that’s a good fit, and you can do that by scheduling an appointment at yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com.

Tim, this wraps up our first four episodes, and we appreciate everyone listening and we’re going to pick back up next week, talking about some of the alphabet soup of retirement accounts. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:38:28] TU: Before we wrap up today’s episode of Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, I want to again thank our sponsor, the American Pharmacists Association. APhA is every pharmacists’ ally advocating on your behalf for better working conditions, fair PBM practices and more opportunities for pharmacists to provide care. Make sure to join A Bolder APhA to gain premier access to financial educational resources, and to receive discounts on YFP products and services.

You can join APhA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com/join, using the coupon code YFP.

[OUTRO]

[00:39:08] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 271: Financing a Home Purchase FAQ


Financing a Home Purchase FAQ

On this episode sponsored by First Horizon, Tony Umholtz takes questions from the YFP Facebook Group related to financing a home purchase including how much down payment is required with a doctor type loan, what to look for when choosing a lender, and ways to reduce the interest rate in a loan.

About Today’s Guest

Tony Umholtz graduated Cum Laude from the University of South Florida with a B.S. in Finance from the Muma College of Business. He then went on to complete his MBA. While at USF, Tony was part of the inaugural football team in 1997. He earned both Academic and AP All-American Honors during his collegiate career. After college, Tony had the opportunity to sign contracts with several NFL teams including the Tennessee Titans, New York Giants, and the New England Patriots. Being active in the community is also important to Tony. He has served or serves as a board member for several charitable and non-profit organizations including board member for the Salvation Army, FCA Tampa Bay, and the USF National Alumni Association. Having orchestrated over $1.1 billion in lending volume during his career, Tony has consistently been ranked as one of the top mortgage loan officers in the industry by the Scotsman’s Guide, Mortgage Executive magazine, and Mortgage Originator magazine.

Episode Summary

This week, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes Tony Umholtz, a mortgage manager for First Horizon, back to the show. During the show, Tony answers common questions about financing a home purchase. Tim shares questions he and Tony often hear, plus questions from the YFP Facebook Group community. Through their discussion, Tony tackles the question of incentives, if any, that are available to first-time home buyers, the amount home buyers should expect to put down with a doctor-type loan, and differentiates between doctor loans and loans pharmacists are eligible to take out. Tony touches on home purchase financing for those that are not first-time home buyers, how pharmacist home loan products might be used to house hack, and limits on the various loan types for pharmacists. When asked about what to look for in a lender, Tony shares that his primary factor to look for with a lender is communication, but it’s also critical to make sure that the lender offers a product that meets your needs. We close with insight on lender types, the competitiveness of the doctor-type loan, ways to get lower rates, how student loans are factored into the debt-to-income ratio, and some forecasting on the home financing landscape if we move into a recession.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had a chance to welcome back onto the show, Tony Umholtz, a mortgage manager for First Horizon, formerly IBERIABANK. During the show, Tony takes the hot seat as I asked him questions posed from the YFP Facebook group related to financing a home purchase. Questions we cover include how much down payment is required with a doctor type loan, what to look for when choosing a lender, and ways to reduce the interest rate on a loan. 

Before we hear from today’s sponsor and then jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfplanning.com. 

Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then we’ll jump into my interview with Tony Umholtz. 

Does saving 20% for a down payment on a home feel like an uphill battle? It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meaning that saving 20% for a down payment on a home may take years. We’ve been on the hunt for a solution for pharmacists that are ready to purchase a home with a lower down payment and are happy to have found that option with First Horizon, previously IBERIABANK/First Horizon. 

First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, aka a doctor or pharmacist home loan, that requires a 3% down payment for a single family home or townhome, has no PMI and offers a 30-year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to $647,200. The pharmacist home loan is available in all states, except Alaska and Hawaii, and can be used to purchase condos as well. However, rates may be higher, and a condo review has to be completed. 

To check out the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan and to start the pre-approval process, visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/homeloan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/homeloan.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:25] TU: Tony, welcome to the show. 

[00:02:27] TONY UMHOLTZ: Tim, it’s good to see you. Happy to be here.

[00:02:30] TU: Excited to have you back, and I always appreciate your expertise and what you have to share with our community. This is an exciting episode, as we’re doing a commonly asked questions about financing of a home purchase, and we’ve got a handful of questions that have come in from the YFP Facebook group. We’ve got some others that we, either you or I, often get asked as well. So we’ll sprinkle those in throughout the episode. 

I suspect most of our listeners now know who you are. You’ve been on the podcast several times, but I don’t want to assume that. So give our listeners some quick background on who is Tony and the work that you do at First Horizon.

[00:03:06] TONY UMHOLTZ: Well, thanks, Tim. Yeah. Scary to say it now, but I’ve been in the mortgage business 20 years, and I’ve been with First Horizon now. But it’s been almost five years, and I’m a residential mortgage lender. So I run a team. We’re able to lend nationally, and we focus on residential mortgage loans and specifically helping folks in the medical community and pharmacists. So it’s been a big, fun business, helping people get to the point of homeownership. The relationships we’ve built over the years has been very gratifying. So that’s what we do, a little bit about us.

[00:03:41] TU: Yeah. It’s been exciting to see the fruit of this collaboration. Actually, I haven’t even shared with you. I had someone reach out to me this week, and a colleague of theirs at the medical center had worked with First Horizon on a loan as a part of a move in a job transition, and she had some questions for me about what they were doing personally. So really cool to hear other pharmacists and colleagues talking and helping one another out, as they’re trying to navigate this decision. 

We’ll talk here in a little bit specifically about the pharmacist home loan product that First Horizon offers, but let’s get started. We’re going to put you in the hot seat with questions that have come in from the YFP Facebook group about lending and securing a loan as a part of the home buying process. 

So first question comes from Randy, Tony, which is what incentives, if any, are available to first time homebuyers? I thought this is a cool question. I bought my first home back in 2009. At the time, you can correct me on exactly what the dollars were and the program, but there was something like an $8,000 first-time homebuyer credit. I know that has changed. So what incentives, if any, are around for first time homebuyers?

[00:04:47] TONY UMHOLTZ: Well, there are several different options for first time homebuyers, but I’ll kind of get into high level. Then we can get into some more of the detail options that are out there. So for example, some of our programs will allow first-time homebuyers put down as low as 3% down. If you’ve owned a home before, you cannot do that, so you have to have been a first-time homebuyer. So it’s limited down payment options. Also, for non-pharmacists, for people who aren’t in that field, there are some limited PMI loans, too, if you’re a first-time homebuyer that you cannot get if you’ve owned before. 

Now, there are certain programs that are available for folks that earn under the median income for the county. Now, this can change for lots of different parts of the country. So it’s very different in different states, different municipalities, different counties. But there’s grant programs that are out there, where you can actually get money towards the purchase of your home. The one thing that you have to look out for with this product or those programs is normally you have to earn under the median income for the county. So that’s a challenging thing sometimes to qualify for. This actually can be harder to qualify for that grant than it is to qualify for the mortgage. 

The other thing to look out for too is a lot of times these grant programs are set up as like a forgivable loan, if you live five years or more. But those are certainly out there, and I encourage people to look for them if they think they qualify. But it can be a little tough to qualify for them, based upon that income qualification.

[00:06:24] TU: So many pharmacists probably won’t meet that median household income requirement. Certainly, we’re looking forward, but I think that’s a good segue to the other options that you’re referring to of potentially lower percent down for first-time homebuyers, which is the question we have that I think Matt is alluding to, which is how much should we expect to have to put down on a primary home with a doctor loan, if we can find a bank that will allow a pharmacist to qualify?

So important words we need to differentiate here would be the doctor loans and those that pharmacists are eligible for, which is not all of them, even though pharmacists are doctors. They worked hard to get that degree. So talk to us about the doctor loan umbrella, and then we can talk more specifically about the pharmacist home loan product that First Horizon has.

[00:07:10] TONY UMHOLTZ: Sure. So there is an MD, Do product out there that’s designated for that segment of professionals. Then, of course, there’s the pharmacist product that we offer. A lot – There is doctor loans that different banks have, and most banks do not include pharmacists in that MD program. They typically focus just on MDs and VOs. We do have that product too, and we have had a lot of success with that in that community. 

But the pharmacist product is very similar. It has no PMI. Really, the only major difference is the loan size. It won’t go as high. So currently, our loan has a cap of about 650 for the maximum loan amount versus the MD product will go higher. But it’s got the same elements, similar rates, and, of course, the No MI is a nice – It’s the biggest benefit of it. To answer that question, definitely there’s two different types of programs out there. There are some for dentists, veterinarians that differ a little bit from this program that we’re discussing for pharmacists.

[00:08:19] TU: Yeah. That was one of the reasons we were excited to begin this collaboration a few years ago was to have an offering that reached most 48 states across the country for pharmacists. Obviously, the maximum loan amount, I think, for many pharmacists is within range. Certainly, folks that might be in higher cost of living areas, think about the Northeast, out west, might rub up against some of the limitation there. 

But just to reiterate what you said, 3% down first-time homebuyers, no PMI, maximum loan amount around 650. Other thing that’s noteworthy here is minimum credit score is around 700. Is that correct, Tony?

[00:08:55] TONY UMHOLTZ: That is, Tim. Good job. 700.

[00:08:58] TU: So my next follow-up question here is what if someone is not a first-time homebuyer? So I’m thinking of the pharmacists listening that maybe have been in a home or two are still looking at taking advantage of a product where they might not have to give up so much cash or use some of the equity they’ve already built from their previous home. Is there an option still available, even if it’s not a first-time homebuyer?

[00:09:17] TONY UMHOLTZ: Definitely, yeah. Really, just the down payment just bumps up to 5% down. So you’re just going up slightly, with a little higher down payment up to 5%, still No MI, all the same elements of same programs, just a little bit more down.

[00:09:32] TU: Okay. One of the common questions I get is is there – We’re not going to talk specific rates because you and I know this change by the hour, by the day. Each time we record these, obviously, we’re seeing significant fluctuations over rate. But a common question I get is, is this product or doctor loans at large, are they competitive with conventional rates? So obviously, I’m having an advantage here that I’m not having to put maybe a traditional 20 percent down, especially if I’m trying to use that cash for other financial goals. But am I potentially giving up rate on a product like this? How do you typically answer that question?

[00:10:09] TONY UMHOLTZ: Well, you’re really not, especially on the 95% product. I’ve found that that program actually carries better rates than if I had like a non-pharmacist client that put 20% down. So you actually can feel good and confident that you’re going to be getting probably a better rate than most, even folks that are putting more down than you. 

The 3% down product sometimes can be about the same as the [inaudible 00:10:37]. The 5% sometimes is a little lower rate, maybe an eighth to a quarter, depending on the day in the market. But it’s very competitive. I mean, I’ve compared it to 20% down, and some days it’s an eighth or a quarter better rate to do that program versus another client getting the 20% down. So I’ve been very happy with that. 

[00:11:02] TU: That’s good information too, knowing the 5% down might be a little bit different than 3%. So as folks connect with you or learn more about the product, evaluating that in the moment doesn’t make sense to put an extra 2% down or not, and they can obviously run the math on that as well. 

So is this just single-family homes? I’m thinking about folks that are maybe looking at multifamily house hacking type of scenario. So are these products limited to single-family homes?

[00:11:29] TONY UMHOLTZ: No, no. It’s available for condos, townhomes. Now, multifamily, two-unit properties, for example, that’s going to require more down. So the LTV does change if you do a two-unit, and the product will not do anything more than two units. So a triplex and quadruplex would not be available under this program. You’d have to do a normal conventional loan or an FHA loan if you’re going to live in the home property. But two units would require 15% down, but you have No MI. So that’s still nice because MI is much higher on a multifamily versus a single-family. So it’s a pretty solid opportunity if you were able to find a duplex. 

Then I will mention, just because I have had numerous clients who have acquired triplex and four-unit, if you live in one of the units, it can be a great long-term investment. I do make this joke, though, because I was looking at one when I was usually dating my wife, and you probably can’t be married and move into a three or fourplex. I’m just generalizing, but I remember when I did it when I was much younger or looking at that time. But it can be a great investment because you live in one unit. You have three renters or two renters paying your rent building equity. I’ve seen tons of success with that. 

It is hard to find them because they’re limited due to primarily zoning in most cities. But FHA is great because they expand the loan levels. You can put 3.5% down in some cities. I mean, I’ve written $700,000 fourplex loans with 3.5% down. So it’s pretty cool.

[00:13:10] TU: Under the pharmacist home loan product, there’s an option for two units, but it’s going to require higher down payment, still benefiting on the No PMI. But then if it’s more than two units, no good under the pharmacist home loan product. 

[00:13:23] TONY UMHOLTZ: That’s right. Yup. 

[00:13:24] TU: Probably looking at FHA or other type of loan. Gotcha. 

[00:13:26] TONY UMHOLTZ: That’s right. That’s right. 

[00:13:28] TU: Next question we have comes from Sarah. What should I look for when trying to find and select a lender and red flags to avoid? So what thoughts and, obviously, I think folks know the disclaimer is that we’re talking about the service of which we collaborate here. But generally speaking, as individual are looking at a lender, what are some things that they should be looking for to make that choice?

[00:13:53] TONY UMHOLTZ: Well, I think one of the most important is communication. I think that that’s critical. Are you getting your questions answered? There’s different types of lenders out there, and there’s a lot of good lenders out there. I think finding one that has a product that fits your needs is important. Obviously, communication, to me, is very important. 

I’ll kind of just go into a quick little summary of the different types of lenders out there. There’s direct lenders that are part of a bank. That’s like myself. There’s correspondent lenders, and then there’s mortgage brokers, who are basically middlemen between the lender and the client. Correspondent lenders, they’re not bank typically banks, right? They’re just independent lenders that will borrow money essentially to lend your money, and then they get rebated on when they sell the mortgage, either Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac, and service can be good across the board. 

But the one thing that I suggest you look out for, and I find it’s really been a challenge with some of the really bigger banks and a lot of banks in general, is the service side because a lot of lenders are set up with what’s called a centralized processing center and closing and underwriting. So those are three critical elements of the process. For example, centralized processing is like a call center in a lot of ways. After the loan originator takes your loan application, you feel comfortable with that offer, they will send it through this centralized system,  where a lot of times in that loan originator’s defense, they can’t get an answer. So they can’t really communicate with you. 

I find that a lot of the times where I have to get involved in a transaction, after it’s been started with someone else, it’s because of that centralized process. It’s just hard because the service isn’t there. The communication is not there. Things usually don’t happen on time. So I would just say that that would be something that a lot of, especially first-time buyers don’t realize, is out there, and they get disappointed in the end. It’s just because of the size, the scale of the operation. They centralize everything. 

One of the contingencies for me to come to this company was that we had our own group, our own processing group, our own closer, our own underwriting group. That way, that communication and that flow would be there, and we wouldn’t have that communication gap or miss any of the milestones that are part of the transaction. Again, just going back through the summary is the communication, to me, is critical. Having the right product, of course, and just making sure you have a process that is going to fit your needs, especially in the purchase market. 

If you’re refinancing, you can wait three months, right? You don’t want to, but you could wait three or four months and be okay. But if you’re in a purchase transaction, you have to execute on time. You have to have your loan commitment on time. So you want to make sure you work with a lender that can do all of those things. Again, I’m being general here because there’s a lot of good lenders. So I’m going to take that as a general list.

[00:16:14] TU: Yeah. That reminds me, Tony, of we talked about shopping for a long-term savings account or shopping for car insurance policy, homeowners insurance policy. It’s easy to get stuck on comparing rates. It’s easy information to gather. You can’t easily compare things like closing on time or accessibility if I have a question or communication, quality of communication interaction. I think that’s where talking with peers, referrals of folks that have worked with somebody before are so important. 

Anyone who has gone through this process knows that there will be a bump in the road. That’s going to happen. There’s a lot of moving pieces or parts when you think about everyone involved in the process of buying or selling a home and, ultimately, getting to the point of having keys in hand. So bumps are going to happen. I think, for first-time homebuyers, I know. I can remember being in the shoes. Those feel big, and they’re weighty, and they certainly are, especially if you’re trying to sell a home to buy a home, and you’re typing things up, and all those moving parts that are involved. But when those bumps arise, having someone that you can communicate with that you feel confident you already have some relationship with, and you can get a hold of quickly is so important. So I think that’ll resonate with many folks that are listening. 

Another question from the group, from Sierra, that I think is a timely one is if we’re going into a recession, and the housing market is still overpriced, is it better to wait? Is it better to wait to purchase? You and I were talking a little bit before we hit record that even from three months ago, when we recorded, we’re seeing some changes that are happening in the market in terms of the competition that’s out there and the bidding wars. Certainly, we’ve seen a change in interest rates, as well, recently. So what are your thoughts here on Sierra’s question about the timing of purchasing a home, especially given the current economic conditions? 

[00:18:53] TONY UMHOLTZ: Well, that’s a great question, and a lot can go into that question. There’s a lot of information that we could talk about here. The main thing I would say is everyone’s situation is different. We’re all in different situations. So if you’re in the middle of renting right now because rent rents are going up at a nice clip each year, and they’re forecasted to continue to go up over the next couple of years. So if you put that against homeownership, a lot of times it’s going to be way ahead to rent or, sorry, to buy versus rent. 

What I’m seeing right now in the market is a very healthy normal market. What we saw the last two years, the last year and a half, wasn’t normal. We had a spike in demand, not enough inventory. I mean, I have a lot of clients that couldn’t get a property, and some of them bowed out of the market. A lot of them actually are coming back in now because the markets – It’s easier to get a home under contract, and you can get better terms, instead of having an appraisal gap contingency, can’t get an inspection, all these other things that were going on. 

Now, you can get a normal inspection done. You don’t have to – You can have an appraisal contingency, maybe even some negotiating power on that appraisal. If something’s coming back on the inspection, you have some negotiating power to get the price lowered. I’ve seen that happen a few times lately.

[00:20:20] TU: Normal stuff, normal stuff. 

[00:20:21] TONY UMHOLTZ: Normal stuff, right? Normal stuff, right? Great stuff. Then as far as the housing market recession – There is a chance, guys. There’s no doubt. There’s a chance we could have a recession. But one thing I’ve learned is no recession looks alike, and we can’t go back and say the recession of 2020 – Obviously, it’s unique. The 2008 recession was unique. 

I started in the business in the dot-com one that we had, and that was unique, right? All of these have their own elements. The dot-com crash that we had, the stock market got penalized, but real estate actually did very well. So everything is – Nothing’s going to be – History does not always repeat perfectly. Everything’s unique in a lot of ways. We learn from history, but that doesn’t necessarily mean that it’s going to repeat that way. 

I would say you always want to be aware of what’s going on, and one housing metric I’ve used over the years is the Case-Schiller Index. Okay, that’s been one of the best housing metrics that I’ve used over the years, and it’s still forecasted to have positive returns I think over the next couple of years last time I looked. So that’s a good forecasting tool. 

The other thing I’ll say is everyone’s market is different, okay. Everyone’s markets different. We can’t generalize and say, “Well, real estate’s just not going to be good,” because every pocket of the country is going to be a little different. So there’s actually been even the last couple of years but a few pockets that have went down a little bit, so not a lot. There’s been a few pockets. So just keep that in mind that real estate can be very much a geographic situation. To say it’s overpriced is tricky. 

I had lunch last week with a builder that I’ve known for some time, and this kind of hit home with me when he told me what it cost for them to get trusses, materials, labor to build a home. It’s hard for me to see prices, really – I mean, if we look at that metric, it’s hard to say prices are going to really drop because those – I don’t see it as –

[00:22:22] TU: Cost [inaudible 00:22:22]

[00:22:24] TONY UMHOLTZ: Yeah. The underlying commodities are not going to fall that much, and labor is still there. So I mean, it’s still going the other way. So I think it’s a tricky – It’s a good question. It’s just hard to say that if we go into a recession, that that’s going to equal guaranteed lower housing prices because it may not be the case. I always say, if you’re going to be in a home for at least – If you project yourself living in a home or an area for five years, it’s going to make sense to own. It’s hard not to. I mean, if you look back at history, you’re usually going to come out way ahead versus renting.

[00:23:02] TU: Especially with your comment before about where rent rates are at today. That’s changed, even in the last three, four years. Certainly, the pandemic has escalated that as well. That is really where – We talked about is your home an asset. We talked about this on the podcast before. When you see people that have been in their home 20, 30, 40 years, and you see the appreciation and also not just the equity that’s been built but also the costs that come through transaction. So if you’re moving every three to four years, transaction costs, closing costs, moving costs, refurnishing the house costs come with all that as well. 

I think that longer term view, if possible, and that’s not always possible, right? Jobs, family, certain things take us different areas. But if we can find that home and be in that home for the long run, that’s where we really start to see I think the home become an asset and a part of our financial plan.

[00:23:55] TONY UMHOLTZ: No question. Having that equity. Just the monthly payments going towards some equity every month, it adds up over time, the tax benefits. I mean, if you’re comparing it versus renting, it’s hard to not own, even if it’s a flat market, even if the market zero over five years. You’re still going to typically come out well ahead because rents are going to go up. 

The one thing too you have to watch is these commodity costs. We’re still underbuilt as a nation. We didn’t build enough inventory the last 12 years to support our population growth and our incoming population by migration to the country, immigration to the country. So as long as that continues, we’re going to be in this situation of rising rents and rising prices. It’s inventory levels you have to watch. If suddenly you see in your area, you’ve got over 6 months to 10 months of inventory, then prices will probably come down some. So I think that’s the metric you watch too is inventory levels, and local realtors can provide color on that.

[00:24:59] TU: Which is another great reminder of how local the markets can be and how inventory is going to fluctuate from one market to another. Sierra also asked, “What are some ways to get lower rates?” I suggest the question. I suspect the question here is outside of just making sure that the individual product and offering is competitive. I suspect this is referring to perhaps purchasing points and trying to lower rate that way, which might be top of mind for folks right now, considering where rates are relative to just a couple years ago. So what thoughts do you have in that area, Tony?

[00:25:32] TONY UMHOLTZ: Yeah. It’s a great question. So a couple of things. I think one thing I would say is you always want to make sure your credit score is the best it can be. That’ll always help you with the best rates. Typically, 740 and above is going to be the best premium best rates available. Then there’s little segments under that. 

I have different times – We look at the market quite a bit, right? I follow the market. I will admit, I’m a bit of a nerd when it comes to that stuff. So I do follow the mortgage market pretty closely and the rates. This has been a time since probably March, even earlier, maybe February. I have not been an advocate of buying points this year because I felt like they spike so quickly. We’d see lower rates, and we have. Since the peak a few months ago, rates are down about 50 basis points, which is half a point from the peak. 

My gut is, over time, we’ll see rates come back to the mean a little bit. But points are always a way to buy a rate down, okay. So you can pay points for that. Again, you got to make sure you have the payback period in place because if you pay one point, you may only get a quarter or three-eighths. Usually, it’s a quarter off the rate on a 30-year fix. It’s going to take you four years of payments to just break even. At that point, you’d be in the money. 

I’m only an advocate of it in certain times and when people are in a position where, “Hey, I’m going to be your forever. I’m going to keep this asset for a long time.” Then we’ll do it. But especially when we see these rates go up quickly, and the yield curve inverts, which is what we have right now, basically the 2-year treasury note is higher than the 10-year treasury note, typically, that is going to lead to lower rates in the future. So I’m not a huge fan of my client paying a lot of points for that, to buy rates where I think they could refi in the future. 

But I think the other thing I’ll mention too, to answer Sierra’s question, is how to get lower rates. This takes a little bit more courage, and I’m more of a person that likes to lock loans, unless it’s a pretty clear market that rates could go down. Then the other thing, it’s the client’s decision. It’s not my decision. It’s not my staff’s decision. But there are times where – Like I have a few clients who are financial people, and they follow the markets, and they’ll say, “Tony, I want to float the market. And when you see this, do this.” 

So there’s a couple people like that, that I’ll have every year that that will float the market and a lot of times can get better rates that way. It takes a little bit more courage and depends on the cycle that we’re in. But if we do like go into a recessionary cycle, floating the rates may be a pretty good way to get a lower rate. So that’s another way to do it.

[00:28:17] TU: Yeah. I think they get their risk tolerance, comfort level margin in the budget or not, right? I think especially for first-time homebuyers, you know, that may or may not be something that folks will be comfortable with.

[00:28:29] TONY UMHOLTZ: Agree, Tim. Sleeping at night is more important.

[00:28:31] TU: Yeah, that’s right. But for people that want to nerd out on that and feel comfortable with that risk, that’s an option. Two last questions I have for you, one about the pre-approval, one about student loans. So let’s start with the pre-approval. How long does a pre-approval last? I know this question is coming up a lot because of maybe people are going into this process, and then they decide, hey, I’m going to bow out. Then they decide to get back in. So talk to us about how long that pre-approval period will last. 

[00:28:59] TONY UMHOLTZ: So when we do a pre-approval, and this is pretty much general for all lenders, when we do a pre-approval letter, we run a credit report. Typically, that credit report is good for about 90 days, is when that credit report is good through. Then after that 90-day period, typically, we’ll have to do another credit poll. I don’t always do that. I mean, if I feel like the client hasn’t had any credit – 

Like we’ve had that conversation. Don’t buy anything new. Have you bought anything new? I haven’t bought anything, no new cars, new credit card things, or new credit cards. As long as that’s the case, we usually will keep it pretty active. But if they need an actual letter updated, we’ll typically run credit again. So 90 days is to answer the question. So I’d say every 90 days, if you’re going to go out beyond that, you probably need another credit update.

[00:29:48] TU: And a good reminder. If folks haven’t heard you say that before, just to sit tight. We don’t want to have major financial changes or decisions that are happening in that 90-day window. 

[00:29:58] TONY UMHOLTZ: That’s right. We try to keep any of those big transactions to a minimum, when you’re looking.

[00:30:02] TU: Last question is student loans. This keeps coming up a lot because we’re now two-plus years into the federal administrative forbearance, set to expire end of this month. So we’re recording mid-August. We’re expecting an announcement literally any moment now from the Biden administration. But nonetheless, we’ve had more than two years since March 2020, where folks have not had to make a payment on qualifying federal loans. 

So the question that comes up here is how are my student loans factored into the debt component, the debt-to-income ratio, especially since I haven’t been making payments, and there isn’t necessarily a track record of what repayment plan I’m in?

[00:30:42] TONY UMHOLTZ: Right. Now, that’s a great question. So there’s two ways to do it. We might have a lot of clarity in the next few weeks, so you may know. But in the case of absolutely no payments being made, there’s a factor we use on the total amount of student loan debt. It’s not as high as like Fannie Mae or FHA would, basically conventional loans and FHA loans require. It’s a lower factor. It’s about half of that. But we basically take a factor of your payments. So let’s just say you had a $10,000 student loan. It would be $50 per 10,000.

[00:31:19] TU: Yup. I’m following you. 

[00:31:21] TONY UMHOLTZ: Yeah. So $100,000 would be 500 a month.

[00:31:26] TU: I think I’m doing the automatic conversion in my mind because we have so many people, and it’s 100, 150, 200, 250,000. Yeah. That’s one of the challenging things because some folks might be on a forgiveness pathway, where they’re paying a very small monthly payment, but they haven’t necessarily started making those income-driven repayment. 

Again, another example where I think working with a lender who, number one, you communicate with, number two, who has some experience working through these issues and answering these questions that I suspect many of our listeners have would be really helpful. 

Tony, this has been great. I love to see the engagement from the community on this topic. I know home buying continues to be a topic of interest among our listeners. So really appreciate you taking time and sharing your expertise.

[00:32:09] TONY UMHOLTZ: Thanks for having me, Tim. It’s great to be here.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:32:12] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, I want to, again, thank this week’s sponsor of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, First Horizon, previously IBERIABANK/First Horizon. We’re glad to have found a solution for pharmacists that are unable to save 20% for a down payment on a home. A lot of pharmacists in the community have taken advantage of First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan, which requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home or townhome and has No PMI on a 30-year fixed rate mortgage. To learn more about the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan and to get started with the pre-approval process, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/homeloan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/homeloan. 

[OUTRO]

[00:32:52] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 270: YFP Planning Case Study #3: Financial and Life Considerations As Retirement Nears


YFP Planning Case Study #3: Financial and Life Considerations As Retirement Nears

On this episode, sponsored by Insuring Income, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Robert Lopez, CFP® to discuss a financial planning case study on financial and life considerations as retirement nears.

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Robert Lopez, CFP®

Robert Lopez, CFP®, is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. Along with his team members, Kimberly Bolton, CFP®, and Savannah Nichols, he helps YFP Planning clients on their financial journey to live their best lives. To go along with his CFP® designation, Robert has a B.S. in Finance and an M.S. in Family Financial Planning. Prior to his career in financial planning, Robert worked as an Explosive Ordnance Disposal Technician in the United States Air Force. Although no longer on active duty, he still participates as a member of the Air Force Reserves. When not working, Robert enjoys being outdoors, playing co-ed volleyball and kickball, catching a game of ultimate frisbee, or hiking with his wife Shirley, young son Spencer, and their dogs, Meeko and Willow. 

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® and Robert Lopez, CFP® to walk through this financial planning case study featuring fictitious clients, The Kims, and their financial and life considerations as retirement nears. In this case study, Tim, Kelly, and Robert discuss Andrew and Courtney Kim and their current financial situation as they prepare for retirement in the next three to five years. As members of the “sandwich generation,” the Kims, in their early 60s, have concerns about caring for Andrew’s elderly mother and their adult son, in addition to a long list of financial goals, including saving for their grandchildren’s education. The team discusses how to best approach retirement by evaluating their investments, social security claiming strategies, and the budget to build their retirement paycheck. Robert shares insight on having open discussions with key players when planning for retirement and how Andrew’s mother and their adult son can factor into the timing and budget associated with their retirement. Kelly tackles some challenging questions surrounding long-term care insurance and whether or not having a policy will be a solid financial decision. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Hi, I’m Tim Baker and today, I chat with YFP Planning Lead Planners, Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Robert Lopez, to walk through our third case study of a fictitious family, the Kims. The Kims are in their early 60s and are very interested in how to best approach retirement in the next three to five years.

We break down how to best approach retirement question by evaluating their investments, discussing social security’s claiming strategies and looking at their budget in order to approach building their retirement paycheck. We also discuss other issues such as caring for an adult child and an aging parent, and some questions around long-term care insurance. I hope you enjoy this episode. First, let’s hear from our sponsor, and then we’ll jump into the show.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[00:00:50] ANNOUNCER: This week’s podcast episode is brought to you by Insuring Income. Insuring Income is your source for all things term, life insurance and own occupation disability insurance. Insuring Income has a relationship with America’s top-rated term life insurance and disability insurance companies, so pharmacists like you can easily find the best solutions for your personal situation.

To better serve you, Insuring Income reviews all applicable carriers in the marketplace for your desired coverage; supports clients in all 50 states and makes sure all of your questions get answered. To get quotes and apply for term life, or disability insurance, see sample contract from disability carriers, or learn more about these topics, visit insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist. Again, that’s insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist.

[EPISODE]

[00:01:41] TB: What’s up, everybody? Welcome back to our case study series. I’m here with Robert Lopez and Kelly Reddy-Heffner. We’re going to be talking about the Kims today. Now in the previous two case studies that we’ve had, we’ve talked about different stages of life, whether it’s a newer pharmacist, a pharmacist that has a younger family that’s trying to work through different issues with college funding.

Today, the Kims, they’re going to be more closer to those years of approaching retirement and really asking those questions about hey, do we have enough? Can we start winding our careers down and look at retirement and more seriously? Robert, Kelly, welcome back to this third installment of the case studies. How’s everything going?

[00:02:25] KRH: Going pretty well. How are you doing, Tim? Welcome back from your –

[00:02:27] TB: Awesome.

[00:02:28] KRH: – sabbatical.

[00:02:29] TB: Yeah, appreciate it. I’m back, energized. I enjoyed the time off. I’m happy to be back. Shaved my head, so I’m in this weird period of, should I shave it again, or not? Yeah, doing fun. How about Robert? How’s everything going with you?

[00:02:42] RL: It’s going pretty good over here. Football season is upon us, so it’s the good time of year.

[00:02:46] TB: Yeah, go Birds. Excited for that. I told my wife, Shay, that we’re back to that time, where Saturdays and Sundays are going to be a little rough in terms of getting anything done. Yeah, I’m excited for football season. It’s actually starting to cool down over the weekend here. We’re in these knees, highs of 70s. Yeah, fall is coming.

Yeah. So let’s jump into it guys. As you guys can see, if you’re watching on YouTube, we share the case study, the fact pattern. Robert is going to kick us off and go through who we’re talking about today. Kelly’s going to go through the goals and some of the debt and I’ll set up the rest of it. We’ll put in protection, some of the tech stuff and some of the facts of the case. Go ahead, Robert. Kick us off here.

[00:03:30] RL: Yeah. Today, we’re going to go over Andrew and Courtney Kim, who are 62 and 60, respectively. Andrew is an operations manager for a defense contractor. He makes $205,000 per year. Courtney is infectious disease pharmacist working for the VA. She makes a $150,000 a year. They file their taxes, married filing jointly. They have two sons, Peter and Logan. Peter is a software engineer, 32, married, two kids, living in San Francisco. Logan actually is living back at the house. He’s 30-years-old, but he recently lost his job and is staying with parents for now. They live in Portland, Oregon. They have a combined gross income of $355,000, which breaks down monthly to $29,583. Their net, which is after taxes and contributions to retirement plans and insurance is $11,795.

They have expenses that break down as $3,500 for fixed expenses, $2,600 for variable expenses, and about $5,600 going to savings, which is better than the 50-30-20 that we aim for, and it’s closer to a 30-22-47. They live in a four-bedroom single-family house they purchased back in ’86 for a $105,000, which is where it’s worth well more now. Is completely paid off. Andrew’s mother who’s 82 lives about an hour away, but that may be changing in the near future based on her health concerns.

[00:04:50] KRH: Of course, as they approach this next transition phase, thinking through some of their goals, so they both are interested in retiring in the next three to five years. Hey want to make sure that they have enough and also, see what their Social Security benefit will be as part of that retirement nest egg and what they have available. Thinking about downsizing. That’s a common conversation. Also, with Logan back in the house and not sure about where mom may need to be residing and what assistance she will need, that’s a consideration. They also have another son and grandchildren in California. Want to make sure insurance is squared away. There may be a time with a gap in health insurance. Understanding what that means before they can be on Medicare.

They want to focus on some more leisure and do the traveling, see the people, do the national parks. Then, they also want to make sure that they can take care of mom and that their children are in okay shape as well, and maybe save some money for the grandchildren’s education in the future. As we start looking at strategy, they also have some debt. They do not have mortgage debt, so that has been paid off in the last year as Robert mentioned. They do have a car note, the very fun Tesla, which has balance.

[00:06:15] RL: You know a little bit about that. Yeah.

[00:06:17] KRH: I do know a little bit about that. Yeah. That apparently, pre-retirement, you need to get the fun car and then have to take care of it. 35,000 left on that car note at 4.5% interest. Then, they took out some private loans for Logan’s education, currently at a 6.75% interest rate with four years left, and that balance is about $24,000.

[00:06:42] RL: Yeah. As we look at the wealth building stuff and be jumping back and forth between this and the net worth statement. Their cash in checking and savings is right about a $100,000, which is they’re probably a little bit over funded there, given the expenses that Robert laid that in 401k that he has with his defense contractor job, he’s putting in 13.2%, which is about $27,000, which is what he can put in $20,500. Then after age 50, you can put the extra 65 in it, $6,500 there. $27,000 is what he’s putting in, plus a 6% match that he gets from his employer. It’s right now invested in target date funds for 2035.

Courtney has a TSP from the VA. She’s has in the middle of the VA long, where we received in the last couple of years. Her pension stuff can probably be similar to what we see with a lot of our clients with regard to that. She’s putting in 18%, which is $27,000. Plus, she gets a 5% match. She’s in basically, 50% CE fund, and 50% iFund, so all equity. Common stock and international companies. She has an old 401k that she hasn’t looked at for a while that has about $165,000 that we have to figure out what to do with that.

Taxable account, joint taxable account has about a $135,000 that they’re putting in $500 a month. It’s currently with an advisor that they speak with infrequently. Mostly C-class mutual funds in an 80$-20% mix. Probably some expense there that we’re not seeing that might be eroding some of the gains. A joint savings account, like I said, that they’re putting $600. This was the $600 a month. This was the mortgage payment, minus some property taxes. IRA is hanging out there, Roth IRAs, 35,000 for Courtney, 85,000 for Andrew that’s managed by that advisor, all equity institutional funds. Probably being charge a fee on that.

All in all, between cash and the investments, and then the value of the house, about 2 million dollars in assets. 2.1 million dollars in assets, so it gives them a total – if you subtract about the $60,000 in liabilities, about 2.036 in net worth million. 2.03 6 million in net worth. In terms of the wealth protection, they both have a term policy use, $500,000, some group life insurance from their employers, both set to expire. They’re their own policies in three years, so at 65 for Andrew and 63 for Courtney. They have some short-term and long-term disability, own occupation through their employers.

Courtney carries a professional liability coverage. Then from the state perspective, they have a will, but it hasn’t been updated in a long time, 20 years. Living well and power of attorneys also need to be updated. There’s some concern about Andrew, mom, if she has the right documents and how that’s going to affect their financial plan. Taxes, they’re doing it themselves right now through TurboTax, concerned about gains on the house if it’s sold. They would like to pay a lot less property tax in the future, which is also one of the reasons that they’re looking to downsize. Concerned about taxes when they take money out of their traditional investment accounts. Just how to best spend down those accounts without being killed in taxes.

Some miscellaneous stuff. They’re both in good health. Andrew thinks that they should take security ASAP, because he doesn’t want to lose out. There’s this idea that I want to get everything, every nickel that I put back in, so it’s definitely a point of conversation that we need to have. Not sure if they should move out of the state, or to a retirement community. Obviously, with the concerns with Andrew’s mother close by, and then should they go to a different state with family in California? Should they phase into retirement? Tougher with the VA, but Andrew could consult, be a contractor with his employer. Then Courtney is very worried about running out of money. “We’d rather be safe than sorry. I would rather work two more years if needed to retire to make sure that the money doesn’t run out.”

That is the facts of the case here, guys. I guess, if we look at goal number one, they want to retire in the next three to five years. If the Kims were our clients, what is the best way? Kelly, I’ll start with you. What is the best way to start breaking down that question of, hey, are we on track to be able to retire comfortably and have the money last in the next three to five years?

[00:10:52] KRH: Usually, what we would do is start with a nest egg, just taking a quick look at what assets they have available, time interval for when they want to retire. You can get a Social Security statement from the Social Security website. It would be good for them to download that data, so that we can see what their monthly and annual amounts will be. There are differences in that amount, based on the timeframe when they take the Social Security. There’s a difference between taking it early, taking it out for retirement age.

I’m guessing with their age range, it’s 67 and some change would be for retirement age. There’s also estimates at age 70. Sometimes age 70 can be a lot more advantageous than even full retirement age. It’s good to run the numbers and take a look. The nest egg gives a good high-level, like, how do things look in terms of being prepared for retirement? Then we also use software with e-money to take a look at a little bit more granular detail spending data. That was one of the things that we had talked about previously in preparing for this is, if they spend a little bit less in retirement, make some changes, it really will have a big impact on overall what they can do. E-money allows us to model different spending scenarios and take a look at what the cashflow is.

[00:12:23] TB: Yeah. I think, the big thing is it’s obviously looking at what they have, their investments, but then also, what is the potential drawdown rate, or withdrawal rate? A lot of people are familiar with the 4% rule, which is a general rule of thumb that if you have a million-dollar portfolio, and you basically take 4% out every year, $40,000, a lot of the math says that that can support 30 years of living off of that. There’s a lot of different ways to do it.

I think, let’s talk a little bit more about the Social Security statement. You mentioned that and I think that’s one of the things that we see that can often be influenced by what you read in the news, what your maybe colleagues have done. Like, they go to retire. Robert, how do you approach the conversation of when, because a lot of the times, a client already has their mind made up about Social Security.

It’s interesting, Morningstar did a study. They said that and a good advisor can basically add something like 30% more to your income in retirement. 9% of that, the biggest chunk of that is proper social security claiming strategies. How would you broach that subject with a client, particularly if they have their mind made up, in this case, Andrew, is saying, “Hey, we need to claim as soon as possible.” Walk me through your approach with that.

[00:13:46] RL: I think, one of the biggest things that you can do for a client is really just showing them all the data. That Social Security statement that you can pull from ssa.gov that Kelly mentioned, really has all that laid out. Now, when we look at Andrew and Courtney here, they look like they’ve probably been maxing out Social Security. Meaning, they’re putting in the most amount that they can per year. In 2022, if he draws now, if you were to retire today and draw, maximum withdrawal at 62 is $2,364 a month. If you were to wait until age 70, that draw would increase to $4,194 a month.

Really showing that differentiator there of this is 1,800 additional dollars per month that you would get by waiting. Then, if he just waits until full retirement, age to 67, then that is $3,345. Nice, in the middle of difference. Really showing them how that would work. Now, for their case, specifically, if they already have their minds made up and say, “Hey, I want to do this.” He says, “Hey, I want to retire in three to five years. I want to draw as early as I can.” Well, just as early as I can mean he wants to draw today and continue working? Because then, we can show the tax consequences of those dollars. How much tax are we going to be paying on the Social Security dollars if he’s continuing to work?

If he’s not going to continue to work and we’re going to wait, say three years and draw at 65, which is still before his defined for retirement age, then we’re not going to be taxed on the majority that that amount as long as she’s not working either. We can show, does this math work, right? Their expenses are not as high as they may believe that they are, because they’re saving a lot of money. If we double up both their Social Security at age 65, maybe she worked for two years longer than he does, so they’re both retire at 65. That solves both of them.

He wants to draw as soon as possible. She wants to maybe work a few extra years to make sure that they get the value, then their social security draw would be the same, but you would need to understand that if something were to happen, they lose one of those securities, right? It’s not that you would get the other person’s. If we were to wait, and we can show this benefit of it for Andrew, we say, wait until age 70 and we’re getting that $4,194, if he were to pass away, then Courtney would take over his larger payment.

[00:15:47] TB: Correct. Yup.

[00:15:48] RL: That’s generally an argument that we can make is whoever was the highest earner, we want to wait the longest amount of time, so that we can get the benefit of those multipliers on the years after full retirement age. The highest amount would be age 70 at this point in time.

[00:16:01] TB: One of the biggest things that we’re trying to solve in retirement is making sure that the money doesn’t run out for the amount of years that we’re going to be alive, which we just don’t know what that is. It’s an educated guess. I think, one of the things that a lot of people and Andrew is showing this like, the sooner the better, because that’s when I get the paycheck. For someone like him who’s the higher earner in the fact pattern, he’s right now making $205,000, Courtney’s making a $150,000 as the infectious disease pharmacist, his Social Security is probably going to be higher at a baseline. It might make sense, although he might be the first to pass away.

I think, probably some questions about Andrew’s mother is alive. She’s 82. Some history of the family, when did Andrew’s father passed away might play a part in this. To your point, when one of the spouses pass away, you basically have the choice. You can either take Andrew, which is probably going to be higher. Or if it does, in fact, be the case that Courtney should just keep hers. At the same breath, you’re still losing the stream of income that you didn’t have. Most of the time, a lot of the time, your expenses don’t basically get chopped in half when the other person’s no longer living. You still have all those fixed expenses, maybe food and things go down like that.

To really combat against this mortality risk of okay, how do we prevent money from not basically being completely spent down, Social Security is going to be one of the biggest attributes for that. With this particular type of client, it’s going to be a smaller percentage of the income, just because they make more money, and Social Security’s going to be capped at a certain amount of income. It’s really important to make a smart claim and decision with regard to the Social Security.

To your point, pulling the Social Security statement, I think, probably I would make sure that they both go through and look at their work years, and the earnings tax for Social Security, to make sure that that is accurate. Sometimes that can be inaccurate. Just seeing what their current benefit is at, it basically outlines from 62 to full retirement age, because they’re both born after 1960. It’s going to be, basically, 67 is full retirement age. Then how does that change by percentage if we can lock in income if we wait to age 70? Then, it shows that in the benefit calculator estimate.

Social Security website is actually pretty good, and be able to basically pull down those statements in real-time, I think is going to be solid. The way that social security is calculated is it takes your 35 most-highest paid years to make that calculation, which is another reason why potentially phasing into retirement, or delaying retirement is going to be a big tool to make sure that, because we might log another year where they’re earning six figures, which maybe they didn’t do that early in the career.

We look at the nest egg. We might look at some of the spending. Kelly, how do you approach looking at this? Because unfortunately, it comes back to the B word, which is budget. How do you actually walk clients through that and try to project what they actually will need from their retirement accounts? What does that look like in practice?

[00:19:18] KRH: I mean, that’s a great question. The nest egg does an estimator. Do 70, 80, 90, 100. In this case, seeing that their expenses were lower, the nest egg worked estimating lower expenses. I guess, from there, the question would be, if you estimated 50% of expenses for each side, I lean towards having the numbers in place, so that people can see, this is actually what this looks like. We do have a spending budget template and then we also can do things again in e-money, where there is an expense section where you can add in different anticipated expenses.

We see some go away. They’re not going to be making retirement contributions, if they’re fully retired. In this case study, it will be interesting and would be a conversation with the client. Although, I suspect that they would ask it back to us, to answer with Logan and mom, what can they afford to do? It is an interesting time period and not all that uncommon for kids to be in an age where they still need a little bit of assistance in trying to define what that is and what you can afford to do for them and with them. The circumstances, unfortunate with Logan, but I think it is worth having the conversation about. It is still a private student loan on the balance sheet. It is him in their household, what is he contributing? How long? Have they set some parameters for what they’re willing to do, and then us helping them figure out what they can possibly afford to do, if they are interested in downsizing, which is on that goal list.

Mom is a whole another host of questions. Understanding what resources she has available. Then trying to figure out what really they could afford to help her to do. I mean, I think the actual numbers are pretty helpful to see, especially when you do have other family members involved and really be as detailed as you can about what the budget might look like.

[00:21:35] TB: Yeah. I think, it’s one thing to fill out a spreadsheet, it’s like, okay, I think this is what we pay for food, or this is what we pay for utilities, or travel. Then, I think if you actually link it to credit cards and debit cards and savings accounts, checking accounts, typically, there’s a lot more there that we don’t necessarily account for. I think, probably it’s a good exercise to do both, and then compare. I think, there’s some planners out there that they’ll look at, hey, how much money came in for year 2021. They basically say, “This is what I need to plan.”

I almost build a paycheck with just the same thing in mind, even going into retirement. A lot of what we typically do with the nest egg, is we discount it by a certain amount, because we’re not going to be saving, in this case, 13% for Andrew for his 401k, and 18% for Courtney’s TSP. There’s a discount just in that alone. It comes back to that. It’s like, it’s the building block of how we need to be able to disperse. Once we made that decision with Social Security, what’s the gap?

Obviously, it’s going to be in phases. If they do retire at 65, maybe we draw down the investment portfolio a lot more aggressively, until we get to a delayed Social Security at 68, 69, even 70. Then that picks up and we let the investments take a little bit of a breather for that. In terms of this idea of sandwich, the sandwich generation. That’s where there’s a household that’s basically, they’re taking care of themselves, or trying to, but then they’re also taking care of a parent, and then an adult child. Tough conversations, guys. Robert how do you begin to have that in terms of like, “Hey, we need to take care of number one, which is you, versus, hey, I know, this is really important to you.” Because the other thing is they’re also talking about education for their grandkids. How do we begin to dissect that part of their financial plan?

[00:23:32] RL: I want to start off by saying, I’ve never heard the term ‘sandwich generation’. Since Kelly’s a member of that generation, I think it’s very interesting.

[00:23:40] KRH: I’m not 60 yet.

[00:23:44] RL: Generational. Generational. No, I think having that conversation with Logan is the most important part, right? We don’t know what he’s professionalized in this scenario. He says, he lost his job recently and had to move back in with mom and dad. Is he an engineer like his brother? Is he a developer? Is he a starving artist? What’s going on here? How does that really work out? Laying it out.

We can’t be the centers of the universe forever. They’re parents, so they want to take care of their kids. They want to help the generation after them, but they can’t take care of everybody all at once. Really coming to terms with that. Letting the kids know. Logan might be very open to understanding of, “Hey, mom and dad want to retire in the next year or two. We really need you to be on your own. Hey, grandma is not doing so well. She’s going to need your room, bud. You’re 30-years-old. It’s time for you to figure it out.” Really laying it out, I think would do well.

Then having that conversation with Peter as well. Peter may already have retirement – I’m sorry. Education savings for his kids set up. Those kids may have another set of grandparents that are also trying to set up accounts and everything. Again, they don’t have to be the center of the universe. They need to be center of their own world and make sure that they’re taking care of themselves, numero uno.

[00:24:53] TB: Yeah, they might be like, again, we’re not trying to solve everything right away. If this listed as the number five, the last goal, it might be that, let’s get the – let’s figure out the debt, which the debt isn’t bad. I think, there’s a question of, do we just take some of the cash that we have, the $100,000 between checking and savings and apply that to the $59,000 that we have between the Tesla and the private loans, and private loans between the six and three quarters, the Tesla being 4.50%. Clear the board there.

Then we start looking at as we get the expense information in a little bit better, if 65 is the goal, which is what I would be pushing for, because that’s when Medicare starts. There’s not necessarily a gap in that regard from a healthcare perspective. Maybe it’s like, your, your will is actually set to bequeath some of that money to grandkids. Obviously, there’s in Oregon, you can get some tax advantages if you’re putting money into a 529 today. It’s minimal. I think those things are possible, but I think we take it in bite sizes.

I agree with you. I think it’s like, had that discussion with Logan, have that discussion with mom and see where she’s at in terms of – because that’s, a lot of moms do not want to move back in. That can be a struggle, just to make sure that they’re getting care, but there can be that loss of independence if they’re now living with you, or if they have to go live in assisted living, or things like that.

I think, it’s level setting those expectations. Like what we always say, even with the education piece, you can’t take retirement loans. You can take student loans and other things, but eventually, someone like Logan has to figure it out and do their thing. That can be a very strong pull on the financials.

In terms of this idea of long-term care insurance. I guess, what’s your guys take on that, as they’re right in that age, where the challenge here is time in, if and when to actually purchase these policies. The sweet spot is usually 60 to 65. Some people say 50. The problem is, if you purchase that 50, you could be paying these premiums that go up regularly for 30, 40 years, before you even have the – you make a claim. I guess, what’s your guys’s takes on the long-term care insurance question that they have in terms of looking at policies and purchasing them for in the event that they need some assistance in that regard? Kelly, what do you think?

[00:27:24] KRH: This is a hard question, I think with the long-term care insurance, I’m going to be honest.

[00:27:28] TB: I agree.

[00:27:30] KRH: On the one hand, right, if you’re going to pay premiums for a long time, it may add up that you have paid more in premiums than what you’re going to get out of it. Care is expensive. It does involve a little bit of personality and understanding what people’s expectations are, too.

If you have someone who is like, “I am never leaving my house. I don’t want people in my house helping me.” I mean that personality would be hard to justify a long-term care policy, because they are going to be very resistant to using what you would get from it. But the care costs are expensive. At some point, that certainly should be a conversation piece, like how much could be anticipated in that cost, with all insurance products. It’s a tradeoff between paying a premium to have somebody else cover an amount that you cannot pay for out of pocket for a recovery that you would like to have in the event that something happens. Or you’re paying out of pocket. Like, you have enough resources to take care of the care that you have in your mind, that you want to have happen.

In the e-money data, we do usually build in two years at the end of assuming some type of substantial care is needed in those last two years. That data can help answer this question to see like, what would that cost be? It’ll project it out in future dollars and give a very realistic, like this could be what you would have to face. I mean, certainly things happen where care is needed ahead of those last two years. It can be a combination. Certainly, the quality of the long-term care product would be a big piece. Can you get in-home care as part of it, if that is what is desirable? There’s a lot of nuances.

The person that helps give some quotes for some of the life and disability. They do some of the long-term care insurance as well, so we sometimes will talk to them about some of these questions and see scenarios where it makes sense. Again, personality, cost, what’s the alternative if you don’t have it? Sometimes it’s a completely opposite, which is spending down and trying to figure out a strategy to not have so many sources.

[00:30:02] TB: Medicaid, right? Yeah.

[00:30:03] KRH: Right. Then are you okay with what that care looks like in your area where you might be receiving care? Those are all very difficult questions to answer. If the cash flow is good, and it makes sense to do it, and it’s affordable and you’re in that sweet spot. If you’re on the conservative side, you might lean towards doing it. If you like more risk, or more adverse to accepting care, it might not be as big of a priority.

[00:30:37] TB: When we talk about long-term care, that’s really – it’s insurance that provides assistance, usually through assisted living, a nursing home care, home health care. Sometimes personal, or adult day care for individuals, 65 or older that have a chronic or disabling. This is typically people that are having trouble using the bathroom, dressing themselves, feeding themselves, that type of thing. They did a study in 2020 that the average cost, the current medium annual costs for assisted living is $51,600. For an in-home health aide is 50, almost $55,000. For a private room in a nursing home, it’s a $106,000, which obviously, can be a pretty big chunk of that investment portfolio.

However, about 80% of long-term care is provided at home by unpaid family members. That’s where you might say, “Hey, Peter. What’s the plan for this?” I know conversations with my parents, they don’t want us to have to really have to deal with that. They rather have some care by something that they’re paying for. I think, it’s just family-to-family. A lot of a lot of families, you’re it, and that might be the case with Andrew and his mom is that it’s more of a self-insured type of thing.

As we know with most things, the price of this type of care is going up and as are the premiums for these type of policies. That’s the challenge. I know, some of the people that we wrote policies at my last firm is that they would buy these policies, and then a couple years later, the premiums would go up 10%, 20%, and they would let them last. I’m just going to go at it on my own. It’s really a personal decision in terms of what your strategy is, and how you want to attack it, but it’s definitely something that I think we as fiduciaries need to see what comes back from the client in terms of their approach. It’s a tough one. I’m with you. How about Robert, do you have anything to add to that?

[00:32:39] RL: No. I think you guys did a really good job on that one.

[00:32:42] TB: We talked about the insurance. Any other gaps and the protection? Obviously, I think one of the things, Robert, that we should be looking at is just the estate stuff, and making sure that that is all updated and good to go. Probably start to look at the mom stuff, too, right?

[00:32:57] RL: Definitely. Obviously, if you have an estate plan that was drawn up 20 years ago, there’s going to be some things that have shifted, or changed. In that meantime, your boys were 10 and 12. Best at that point, maybe you want one of them to be your power of attorney, or your health care proxy. Maybe you want a different family member to be that executor. Maybe you want to pass things along differently now that you have grandkids that you definitely didn’t even imagine at that point in time when your kids were in middle school.

Then definitely, mom, we really want to understand what mom has going on. Is she independently wealthy, and she’s never going to live with us by choice? Does she have a bunch of heirlooms that she wants to pass along? Does she have her wishes laid out in order? Or do you know them? Because Andrew is going to be in charge of those decision-making questions. When the doctors ask, what does she want in this situation? You’re going to have to know the answer or you’re going to have to have that document to provide.

Really having those conversations, or those legal discussions would be really valuable ahead of time. Most people, when we think about estate planning, it’s because we don’t want to become a burden to our family. We don’t want to be troublesome in that situation. We want to lay out as much as we can, beforehand. She may have all that flushed out in a folder ready to go. She may have none of those documents, hopes and dreams that she’s going to live to 200. It’s really important to understand where everyone lies on that and have really honest and open conversations.

[00:34:14] TB: Yeah, I agree. I think that’s probably a big risk that can be easily mitigated by just now with an attorney and writing those things out and just keeping it fresh in that regard. Probably, the only other thing that I would address, I think, there was concern about gains on the house that they sell that. I know a lot of that gain is going to be excluded, probably half a million, if they’re filing their taxes together. There might be some gain that they will have to realize and plan for. If they basically downsize to a property, they might be able to exclude some of that as well. I think, probably working with a tax person as they’re approaching retirement would be good.

I think, the only other big concern here guys that I have, would be just looking at the overall investment allocation. We’re saying that a lot of it’s an equity. There’s probably not a lot in bonds, 80-20 in the taxable account. They’re approaching the eye of the storm with regard to the – if they’re looking to retire in three to five years, really, that’s probably the one time in their entire investment lies, where they probably need to be as conservative as they will ever be. What we’re really trying to mitigate here is sequence of return risk. This is basically where the market corrects, or we’re in a recession, it goes down 20%, or 30%, and then your withdrawal and $40,000 out of that. That typically leads to unsustainable and rates of failure with regard to pulling money from the portfolio.

As you’re approaching that eye of the storm, so to speak, instead of having an 80-20 or 100-0, we really need to be closer to maybe a 60-40, 50-50 to make sure that we’re protecting the things that we’ve grew over the course of their career. Then as we come out of the eyes of the storm when they’re in their 70s, and so on, maybe we get a little bit more aggressive, because we have it figured out and we’re looking more towards making sure it’s long-term. There’s lots of different ways to look at that, whether it’s a systemic withdrawal, a function approach, or something similar to that.

That probably would be to look at the investments in totality and making sure that for these last couple years, we’re looking more from a safety perspective, versus let’s try to get the portfolio as big as we can.

Guys, I think that’s probably a pretty good place to start. I think, for this one, more questions than answers. I think that’s a good thing. I appreciate the look at this case study with the Kims and looking forward to next time.

[00:36:45] RL: Sounds good. Looking forward to it.

[END OF EPISODE]

[00:36:47] ANNOUNCER: Before we wrap up today’s show, let’s hear an important message from our sponsor, Insuring Income.

If you are in the market to add own occupation, disability insurance, term life insurance, or both, Insuring Income would love to be a resource. Insuring Income has relationships with all of the high-quality disability insurance and life insurance carriers you should be considering and can help you design coverage to best protect you and your family.

Head over to insuringincome.com/yourfinancialpharmacist, or click on the link in the show notes to request quotes, ask a question, or start down your own path of learning more about this necessary protection.

[DISCLAIMER]

[00:37:23] ANNOUNCER: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding material should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]